Kia 2015 Soul Owners Manual Pdf 15soul En

User Manual: Kia 2015 Kia Soul Owners Manual Pdf 2015 Kia Soul Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 492 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

PS CAN (ENG) FOREWORD
PS CAN (ENG) 1
PS CAN (ENG) 2
PS CAN (ENG) 3
PS CAN (ENG) 4
PS CAN (ENG) 4b (~Audio)
PS CAN (ENG) 5
PS CAN (ENG) 6
PS CAN (ENG) 7
PS CAN (ENG) 8
PS CAN (ENG) INDEX

Kia, THE COMPANY

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-

cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you

with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the

time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes

at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can

be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a

result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-

ble to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer

knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-

nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-

ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-

tion.

Because subsequent owners require this important information

as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is

sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-

nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-

plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual

that provides important information on all warranties regarding

your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the

recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation

of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features

for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment

described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,

may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual

were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to

discontinue or change specifications or design at any time

without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you

have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring

pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any

information storage and retrieval system or translation in

whole or part is not permitted without written authorization

from Kia Canada Inc..

Printed in Korea

Foreword

Introduction

How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors

/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system /

Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance

Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /

Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Etc.

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle Break-In Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your

vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can

assist you in many ways. We strong-

ly recommend that you read the

entire manual. In order to minimize

the chance of death or injury, you

must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words

in this manual to best explain how to

enjoy your vehicle. By reading your

manual, you will learn about fea-

tures, important safety information,

and driving tips under various road

conditions.

The general layout of the manual is

provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a

specific area or subject; it has an

alphabetical listing of all located in

the back of this manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sec-

tions plus an index. Each section

begins with a brief list of contents so

you can tell at a glance if that section

has the information you want.

You will find various types of safety

instructions in this manual. These

instructions were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.

Carefully read and follow ALL proce-

dures and recommendations provid-

ed in these instructions.

✽✽ NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or

helpful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation

in which harm, serious bodily

injury or death could result if the

warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation

in which damage to your vehicle

could result if the caution is

ignored.

Introduction

Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use

only unleaded fuel having a pump

octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or high-

er. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEAD-

ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust

emissions and spark plug fouling.

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult an

authorized Kia dealer for details.)

✽✽ NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one

time, otherwise the fuel cap open

warning indicator light (or LCD

display) will illuminate.

Gasoline containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alco-

hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-

taining methanol (also known as

wood alcohol) are being marketed

along with or instead of leaded or

unleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol

may be used in your vehicle. Do not

use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use gaso-

line or gasohol containing any

methanol. Ethanol provides less

energy than gasoline and it attracts

water, and it is thus likely to reduce

your fuel efficiency and could lower

your MPG results. Methanol may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine con-

trol system and emission control sys-

tem.

Discontinue using gasohol of

anykind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability prob-

lems may not be covered by the

manufacturer's warranty if they result

from the use of:

1. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.

2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15

percent gasoline, and is manufac-

tured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-

ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”

may result in poor engine perform-

ance and damage to your vehicle's

engine and fuel system. Kia recom-

mends that customers do not use

fuel with an ethanol content exceed-

ing 10 percent.

✽✽ NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

does not cover damage to the fuel

system or any performance prob-

lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

WARNING - Refueling

• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off.

Attempts to force more fuel

into the tank can cause fuel

overflow onto you and the

ground causing a risk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage, especially

in the event of an accident.

Introduction

Other fuels

Using fuels such as

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained

fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metalic additives contained

fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine dam-

age or cause plugging, misfiring,

poor acceleration, engine stalling,

catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,

life cycle reduction, etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate

✽✽ NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the use

of these fuels may not be covered by

your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful

manganese-based fuel additives

such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadi-

enyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Kia does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle

performance and affect your emis-

sion control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on

the cluster may come on.

Use of MTBE

Kia recommends avoiding fuels con-

taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen

Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%

vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)

may reduce vehicle performance and

produce vapor lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage

to the fuel system and any per-

formance problems that are

caused by the use of fuels con-

taining methanol or fuels con-

taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Introduction

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood

alcohol) should not be used in your

vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce

vehicle performance and damage

components of the fuel system,

engine control system and emission

control system.

Fuel Additives

Kia recommends that you use good

quality gasolines treated with deter-

gent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which helps

prevent deposit formation in the

engine. These gasolines will help the

engine run cleaner and enhance per-

formance of the Emission Control

System. For more information on

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,

please go to the website (www.top-

tiergas.com).

For Customers who do not use TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,

and have problems starting or the

engine does not run smoothly, addi-

tives that you can buy separately

may be added to the gasoline. If

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not

available, one bottle of additive

added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles

or every engine oil change is recom-

mended. Additives are available from

your authorized Kia dealer along with

information on how to use them. Do

not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

Introduction

As with other vehicles of this type,

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly may result in loss of control,

an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (high-

er ground clearance, track, etc.) give

this vehicle a higher center of gravity

than other types of vehicles. It is not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as a conventional 2-wheel

drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid

sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly may result in loss of control, an

accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure

to read the “Reducing the risk of a

rollover” driving guidelines, in

section 5 of this manual.

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per

minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow. Varying engine speed is need-

ed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to seat

properly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first

2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCESS

VEHICLE HANDLING

INSTRUCTIONS

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The

main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle's

systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/ fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-

ing.

These data can help provide a bet-

ter understanding of the circum-

stances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of per-

sonally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investiga-

tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Hood .....................................................4-32

2. Head lamp...................................4-90, 7-78

3. Fog lamp .....................................4-93, 7-81

4. Tire and wheel...............................7-47, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-51

6. Panoramic sunroof................................4-37

7. Front windshield wiper blades.....4-94, 7-41

8.Windows ................................................4-26

OPS013001N

■Front view

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

9. Door......................................................4-19

10. Fuel filler lid ........................................4-34

11. Rear combination lamp.......................7-82

12. Tail gate ..............................................4-24

13. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-84

14. Rear window defroster......................4-102

15. Antenna ............................................4-146

16. Rearview camera................................4-88

OPS013002N

■Rear view

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle ................................4-19

2. Power window switch ............................4-27

3. Power window lock button.....................4-30

4. Central door lock switch........................4-21

5. Outside rearview mirror control.............4-51

6. Outside rearview mirror folding.............4-52

7. Fuel filler lid open lever.........................4-34

8. Instrument panel illumination control

switch ...................................................4-55

9. Steering wheel heater On/Off button ....4-45

10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button....5-44

11. ESC Off button....................................5-29

12. Advanced Lighting Speaker ..............4-149

13. Steering wheel ....................................4-43

14. Tilt and telescopic steering control

lever.....................................................4-44

15. Inner fuse panel ..................................7-63

16. Hood release lever..............................4-32

17. Seat.......................................................3-2

18. Transaxle shift lever ...................5-14, 5-17

OPS013004N

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Audio remote control buttons..............4-147

2. Driver’s front air bag .............................3-51

3. Horn......................................................4-45

4. Cruise control button ............................5-38

5. Instrument cluster .................................4-54

6. Lighting control lever.............................4-90

7.Wiper and washer control lever.............4-94

8. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop

button...............................................5-6, 5-9

9. Audio...................................................4-146

10. Hazard warning flasher.........................6-2

11. Climate control system..........4-104, 4-114

12. Front seat warmer/

Seat air ventilation.................4-136, 4-138

13. Power outlet......................................4-140

14. Center console storage box..............4-132

15. Glove box..........................................4-132

16. Passenger’s front air bag....................3-51

17. Parking brake......................................5-25

OPS013003N

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OPS073001

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-34

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27

3. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-27

4. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-29

5. Radiator cap .....................................7-31

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-32

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44

8. Negative battery terminal..................7-44

9. Fuse box...........................................7-62

10. Air cleaner.......................................7-36

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■1.6L GDI

Your vehicle at a glance

OPS073002

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-34

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27

3. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-27

4. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-29

5. Radiator cap .....................................7-31

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-32

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44

8. Negative battery terminal..................7-44

9. Fuse box...........................................7-62

10. Air cleaner.......................................7-36

■■2.0L GDI

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Air bag -

advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . . 3-39

• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-57

• SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-

equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(Driver’s seat)

(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

(5) Headrest

Rear seats

(6) Seatback folding

(7) Headrest

SEATS

OPS033001N

Manual seat

Power seat

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Seat cushion

Occupants should never sit on

seat cushions. The passenger's

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an

accident or a sudden stop.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

Do not press the release lever

on a manual seatback without

holding and controlling the

seatback. The seatback will

spring upright possibly impact-

ing you or other passengers.

WARNING - Loose

objects

Do not place anything in the dri-

ver's foot well or under the front

seats. Loose objects in the dri-

ver's foot area could interfere

with the operation of the foot

pedals.

WARNING

- Driver responsibility for

passengers

The driver must advise the pas-

senger to keep the seatback in

an upright position whenever

the vehicle is in motion. If a seat

is reclined during an accident,

the occupant's hips may slide

under the lap portion of the seat

belt, applying great force to the

unprotected abdomen.

1KMN3662

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

-Seat adjustment

• Do not adjust the seat while

wearing seat belts. Moving the

seat forward will cause strong

pressure on the abdomen.

• Do not place your hand near

the seat adjusting the seat.

Your hand could get caught in

the seat mechanism.

• Use extreme caution when

picking small objects trapped

under the seats or between

the seat and the center con-

sole. Your hands might be cut

or injured by the sharp edges

of the seats mechanism.

WARNING - Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing. This could result in loss

of control.

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position of

the seatback. Storing items

against a seatback or in any

other way interfering with prop-

er locking of a seatback could

result in serious or fatal injury

in a sudden stop or collision

• Sit as far back as possible from

the steering wheel while still

maintaining comfortable con-

trol of the your vehicle. A dis-

tance of at least 10" from your

chest to the steering wheel is

recommended. Failure to do so

can result in airbag inflation

injuries to the driver.

WARNING - Unexpected

Seat Movement

After adjusting a manual seat,

always check that it is locked by

shifting your weight to the front

and back. Sudden or unexpect-

ed movement of the driver's

seat could cause you to lose

control of the vehicle.

WARNING

- Rear seatbacks

Always lock the rear seatback

before driving. Failure to do so

could result in passengers or

objects being thrown forward

injuring vehicle occupants.

WARNING - Luggage and

Cargo

Do not stack pile or stack lug-

gage or cargo higher than the

seatback in the cargo area. In an

accident the cargo could strike

and injury a passenger. If

objects are large, heavy or must

be piled, they must be secured

in the cargo area.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - manual

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or back-

ward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and

make sure the seat is locked securely

by trying to move forward and back-

ward without using the lever. If the

seat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of the

seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its orig-

inal position for the seatback to

lock.)

Seat height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat,

push the lever upwards or down-

wards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the

lever up several times.

OPS033002

OPS033003 OPS033004

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - power

(if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the control switches located on

the outside of the seat cushion.

Before driving, adjust the seat to the

proper position so you can easily con-

trol the steering wheel, pedals and

switches on the instrument panel.

When in operation, the power seat

consumes a large amount of electri-

cal power. To prevent unnecessary

charging system drain, don’t adjust

the power seat longer than neces-

sary while the engine is not running.

Forward and backward

Push the control switch forward or

backward to move the seat to the

desired position. Release the switch

once the seat reaches the desired

position.

OPS033005

CAUTION - Power seat

adjustments

The power seating controls

function by electronic motor.

Excessive operation may cause

damage to the electrical equip-

ment.

CAUTION - Power Seating

Do not operate two or more

power seat control switches at

the same time. Doing so may

damage the power seat motor or

electrical components.

WARNING - Unattended

children

Do not leave children unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Children might

operate features of the vehicle

that could injure them.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback angle

Push the control switch forward or

backward to move the seatback to

the desired angle. Release the

switch once the seat reaches the

desired position.

Seat height (for driver’s seat)

Pull the front portion of the control

switch up to raise or press down to

lower the front part of the seat cush-

ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or press down

to lower the rear part of the seat

cushion. Release the switch once the

seat reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support can be adjusted

by pressing the button.

OPS033006 OPS033007 OPS033008

Safety features of your vehicle

Headrest (for front seat)

The driver's and front passenger's

seats are equipped with a headrest

for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides com-

fort for the driver and front passenger,

but also helps protect the head and

neck in the event of a rear collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of

an accident, the headrest should be

adjusted so the middle of the headrest

is at the same height of the center of

gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the center of gravity of most

people's head is similar with the height

of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the

headrest as close to your head as pos-

sible. For this reason, the use of a

cushion that holds the body away from

the seatback is not recommended.

Forward and rearward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted for-

ward to 4 different positions by

pulling the headrest forward to the

desired detent. To adjust the head-

rest to it’s furthest rearward position,

pull it fully forward to the farthest

position and release it. Adjust the

headrest so that it properly supports

the head and neck.

OPS034058N

OPS033009

WARNING - Headrest

removal/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehicle

with the headrests removed.

Headrests can provide critical

neck and head support in a

crash.

• Do not adjust the headrest

height while the vehicle is in

motion. Driver may lose con-

trol of the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the

headrest, push and hold the release

button (2) on the headrest support

and lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback(2) with the

recline lever or switch(1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

OPS033010

CAUTION

If you recline the seatback

towards the front with the head

restraint and seat cushion

raised, the head restraint may

come in contact with the sunvi-

sor or other parts of the vehicle.

OYFH034205 OPS033047L

OPS033049L

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

103

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release

button (1).

2. Recline the seatback(4) with the

recline lever or switch(3)

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropri-

ate height.

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed.

OPS033048L

OPS033050L

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after rein-

stalling and adjusting it properly.

WARNING - Headrest

Reinstallation

To reduce the risk of injury to

the head or neck, always make

sure the headrest is locked into

position and adjusted properly

after reinstalling.

311

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the front passenger’s

seatbacks.

Rear seat adjustment

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in

the pocket (if equipped) between

the rear seatback and cushion,

and insert the rear seat belt web-

bing in the guide to prevent the

seat belt from being damaged.

OPS033016

WARNING - Folded down

seatback

Never allow passengers sit on top

of the folded down seatback while

the vehicle is moving.This is not a

proper seating position and no

seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury

or death in case of an accident or

sudden stop.

WARNING - Objects

Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of

the front seatbacks. This could

allow cargo to slide forward and

cause injury or damage during

sudden stops.

WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp

objects in the seatback pocket.

An occupant could contact such

objects in a crash. Heavy objects

in the front passenger seatback

could also interfere with the

airbag sensing system.

OPS033017

OPS033015

Safety features of your vehicle

123

2. Set the front seatback to the

upright position and if necessary,

slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the

lowest position.

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,

then fold the seat toward the front

of the vehicle. When you return the

seatback to its upright position,

always be sure it has locked into

position by pushing on the top of

the seatback.

5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull

the seatback backward by pulling

on the folding lever.

Pull the seatback firmly until it

clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked

in place.

6.Return the rear seat belt to the

proper position.

OPS033018

WARNING - Cargo

Do not place heavy objects in

the rear seats, since they can-

not be properly secured and

may hit vehicle occupants in a

frontal collision.

313

Safety features of your vehicle

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or

the manual transaxle is in R

(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking

brake is securely applied whenever

loading or unloading cargo. Failure to

take these steps may allow the vehi-

cle to move if the shift lever is inad-

vertently moved to another position.

Headrest

The rear seat(s) is equipped with

headrests in all the seating positions

for the occupant's safety and com-

fort.

The headrest not only provides com-

fort for passengers, but also helps

protect the head and neck in the

event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest should

be adjusted so the middle of the

headrest is at the same height as the

center of gravity of an occupant's

head.

Generally, the center of gravity of

most people's head is similar with

the height of the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close to

your head as possible. For this rea-

son, the use of a cushion that holds

the body away from the seatback is

not recommended.

OPA039053

WARNING - Headrest

removal/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehicle

with the headrests removed.

Headrests can provide critical

neck and head support in a

crash.

• Do not adjust the headrest

height while the vehicle is in

motion. Driver may lose con-

trol of the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest :

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest :

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support

2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest :

1. Raise it as far as it can go then

press the release button (1) while

pulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the

holes while pressing the release

button (1).

2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

Make sure the headrest locks in

position after adjusting it to properly

protect the occupants.

OPS033034

WARNING - Headrest

installation

After installing the headrest,

make sure that it is installed in

the right direction.

A headrest installed reversely

could increase whiplash injury

during rear impact.

OPS033033

315

Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest

To use the armrest, pull it forward

from the seatback.

OPS033032

Safety features of your vehicle

163

SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

• For maximum restraint system pro-

tection, the seat belts must always

be used whenever the vehicle is

moving. A properly positioned

shoulder belt should be positioned

midway over your shoulder across

your collarbone.

• Never allow children to ride in the

front passenger seat. See child

restraint system section for further

discussion.

Seat belts are designed to bear upon

the bony structure of the body, and

should be worn low across the front

of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and

shoulders, as applicable; wearing the

lap section of the belt across the

abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection for

which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-

ularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild soap

and water. The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes frayed,

contaminated or damaged.

WARNING - Damaged

seat belt

Replace the entire seat belt

assembly if any part of the web-

bing or hardware is damage as

you can no longer be sure that a

damage seat belt will provide

protection in a crash.

WARNING - Shoulder Belt

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind

your back. An improperly

positioned shoulder belt can-

not protect the occupant in a

crash.

• Always wear both the shoul-

der portion and lap portion of

the lap/shoulder belt.

317

Safety features of your vehicle

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user which

will either prevent the seat belt

adjusting devices from operating to

remove slack, or prevent the seat

belt assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be

careful not to latch the seat belt in

buckles of other seat. It's very dan-

gerous and you may not be pro-

tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten the seat

belt repeatedly while driving. This

could result in loss of control, and

an accident causing death, serious

injury, or property damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt does

not pass over objects that are hard

or can break easily.

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

The driver's seat belt warning light

and chime will activate pursuant to

the following table when the ignition

switch is in "ON" position.

1GQA2083

WARNING - Seat belt

buckle

Do not allow foreign material

(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to

obstruct the seat belt buckle.

This may prevent the seat belt

from fastening securely.

Safety features of your vehicle

183

*1Warning pattern repeats 11 times with

an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's

seat belt is buckled, the light will stop

within 6 seconds and chime will stop

immediately.

*2The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the retractor and insert the metal tab

(1) into the buckle (2). There will be

an audible "click" when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length only after the lap

belt portion is adjusted manually so

that it fits snugly around your hips. If

you lean forward in a slow, easy

motion, the belt will extend and let

you move around. If there is a sud-

den stop or impact, however, the belt

will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. Then you will

be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

B180A01NF-1

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle

Speed Light-Blink Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 5 km/h

(3 mph) 6 seconds None

5 km/h~

10 km/h 6 seconds

Above 10 km/h

(6 mph)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 10 km/h

(6 mph)

↓

Below 5 km/h

(3 mph)

6 seconds *1

↓

Stop *2

319

Safety features of your vehicle

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoul-

der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-

tions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt

should not be too close to your neck.

The shoulder portion should be

adjusted so that it lies across your

chest and midway over your shoulder

near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height

adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while

pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the

anchor into position. Try sliding the

height adjuster to make sure that it

has locked into position.

B200A02NF

WARNING

You should place the lap belt

portion as low as possible and

snugly across your hips, not on

your waist. If the lap belt is locat-

ed too high on your waist, it may

increase the chance of injury in

the event of a collision. Both

arms should not be under or

over the belt. Rather, one should

be over and the other under, as

shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under

the arm that is near the door.

OXM039026

Front seat

WARNING - Shoulder belt

positioning

Never position the shoulder belt

across your neck or face.

WARNING - Seat belt

replacement

Replace your seat belts after

being in an accident. Failure to

replace seat belts after an acci-

dent could leave you with dam-

aged seat belts that will not pro-

vide protection in the event of

another collision.

Safety features of your vehicle

203

Seat belts - Front passenger and

rear seat 3-point system with

combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts

are installed in the rear seat posi-

tions to help accommodate the

installation of child restraint systems.

Although a combination retractor is

also installed in the front passenger

seat position, it is strongly recom-

mended that children always be

seated in the rear seat. NEVER

place any infant restraint system in

the front seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the

features of both an emergency lock-

ing retractor seat belt and an auto-

matic locking retractor seat belt. To

fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab into

the buckle. There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the

buckle. When not securing a child

restraint, the seat belt operates in the

same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the proper

length only after the lap belt portion

of the seat belt is adjusted manually

so that it fits snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended

from the retractor to allow the instal-

lation of a child restraint system, the

seat belt operation changes to allow

the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-

tem” in this section.

✽✽NOTICE

Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protection

for seated passengers in either emer-

gency or automatic locking modes,

have the seated passengers use the

emergency locking feature for

improved convenience. The auto-

matic locking function is intended to

facilitate child restraint installation.

To convert from the automatic lock-

ing feature to the emergency locking

operation mode, allow the unbuck-

led seat belt to fully retract.

Do NOT fold down the left portion of

the rear seat back when the rear

center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS

UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt

before folding down the left portion of

the rear seat back. If the rear center

seat belt is buckled when the left por-

tion of the rear seat back is folded

down, distortion and damage to the

top portion of the seat back and seat

belt garnish may result, causing the

seat back to lock into the folded

down position.

321

Safety features of your vehicle

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing

the release button (1) on the locking

buckle. When it is released, the belt

should automatically draw back into

the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the

belt to be sure it is not twisted, then

try again.

Stowing the rear seat belt

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the

rear seatback and cushion when not

in use.

Routing the seat belt webbing

through the rear seat belt guides will

help keep the belts from being

trapped behind or under the seats.

After inserting the seat belt, tighten

the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION - Seat belt

guide

Remove the seat belt from the

guides before using. If you pull

on the seat belt when it is stored

in the guides, it may damage the

guides and/or belt webbing.

B210A01NF-1

OPS033017

OPS033015

Safety features of your vehicle

223

3 Point rear center belt

To fasten the rear center belt

1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the

open end of the anchor connector

indicating the latch is locked. Make

sure the belt is not twisted.

2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert

the tongue plate (B) into the open

end of the buckle (D) until an audi-

ble “click” is heard, indicating the

latch is locked. Make sure the belt

is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat

belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”

mark must be used.

ORP032073C

ORP032074

WARNING - Rear center

seat belt

Do not separate mini tongue and

mini buckle even if there is not

an occupant.

If it is separated, It may hit the

rear seat occupants in a collision

or sudden stops.

323

Safety features of your vehicle

There will be an audible “click” when

the tab locks in the buckle. The seat

belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt is

adjusted manually so that it fits snug-

ly around your hips, if you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt

will extend and let you move around.

If there is a sudden stop or impact,

the belt will lock into position. It will

also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

When using the rear seat center belt,

you must lock all tongue plates and

buckles.

To unfasten the rear center belt

Press the release button on the

buckle (D) and remove the tongue

plate (B) from the buckle (D).

When you fold the rear seatback

To retract the rear center seatbelt,

insert the tongue plate or similar

small rigid device into the web

release hole (C). Pull up on the seat

belt web (A) and allow the webbing

to retract automatically.

ORP032075

ORP032076K

Safety features of your vehicle

243

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's

and front passenger's pre-tensioner

seat belts (retractor pretensioner and

EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).

The pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated, when a frontal collision is

severe enough, together with the air

bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward

too quickly, the seat belt retractor

may lock into position. In certain

frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner

will activate and pull the seat belt into

tighter contact against the occu-

pant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pre-

tensioner is to make sure that the

shoulder belts fit in tightly against

the occupant's upper body in cer-

tain frontal collisions.

(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)

The purpose of the EFD is to

make sure that the pelvis belts fit

in tightly against the occupant's

lower body in certain frontal colli-

sions.

If the system senses excessive ten-

sion on the driver or passenger's

seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-

tem activates, the load limiter inside

the retractor pre-tensioner will release

some of the pressure on the affected

seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents.Their locations are shown in

the illustration:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)

OPS033036N/Q

OXMA033101

325

Safety features of your vehicle

Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's seat belt pre-tensioner system

may be activated not only in certain

frontal collision but also in certain

side collision or rollover, if the vehicle

is equipped with a side or curtain air

bag.

Because the sensor that activates

the SRS air bag is connected with

the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS

air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds after the

ignition switch has been turned to the

ON position, and then it should turn

off.

✽✽NOTICE

When the pre-tensioner seat belts

are activated, a loud noise may be

heard and fine dust, which may

appear to be smoke, may be visible

in the passenger compartment.

These are normal operating condi-

tions and are not hazardous.

If the pre-tensioner seat belt system

are not working properly, this warn-

ing light will illuminate even if there is

no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned ON, or if it remains

illuminated after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds, or if it illu-

minates while the vehicle is being

driven, have an authorized Kia deal-

er inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt

and SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

WARNING - Skin Irritation

Wash all exposed skin areas

thoroughly after an accident in

which the pre-tensioner seat

belts were activated. The fine

dust from the pre-tensioner

activation may cause skin irrita-

tion and should not be breathed

for prolonged periods.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-

ate only one time. After activation,

pre-tensioner seat belts must be

replaced. If the pre-tensioner must

be replaced, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

Child and/or infant seats must be

properly placed and installed in the

rear seat. For more information

about the use of these restraints,

refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

✽✽NOTICE

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when

properly restrained in the rear seat

by a child restraint system that

meets the requirements of the safety

standards of your country. Before

buying any child restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certify-

ing that it meets safety standards of

your country. The restraint must be

appropriate for your child's height

and weight. Check the label on the

child restraint for this information.

Refer to “Child restraint system” in

this chapter.

WARNING - Hot preten-

sioner

Do not touch the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies for several

minutes after they have been

activated. When the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt mechanism

fires during a collision the pre-

tensioner becomes hot and can

burn you.

327

Safety features of your vehicle

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always

occupy the rear seat and use the

available lap/shoulder belts. The lap

portion should be fastened and

snugged on the hips and as low as

possible. Check if the belt fits period-

ically. A child's squirming could put

the belt out of position. Children are

given the most safety in the event of

an accident when they are restrained

by a proper restraint system in the

rear seat. If a larger child (over age

12) must be seated in the front seat,

the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoul-

der belt and the seat should be

placed in the rearmost position.

Children age 12 and under should be

restrained securely in the rear seat.

NEVER place a child age 12 and

under in the front seat. NEVER place

a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly

touches the child’s neck or face, try

placing the child closer to the center of

the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still

touches their face or neck they need to

be returned to a child restraint system.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear

lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-

ever possible according to specific

recommendations by their doctors.

The lap portion of the belt should be

worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS

POSSIBLE.

WARNING

- Small children

Do not allow small children to

ride in the vehicle without an

appropriate child restraint sys-

tem. If the shoulder belt comes

in contact with your child's neck

or face your child is too small to

ride in the vehicle. In a crash the

seat belt will inflict injury to your

child's neck, throat and face.

WARNING - Pregnant

women

Pregnant women must never

place the lap portion of the seat

belt above or on the abdomen

where the fetus is located. The

force of the seat belt during a

collision will crush the fetus.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should

consult a physician for recommenda-

tions.

One person per belt

Two people (including children)

should never attempt to use a single

seat belt. This could increase the

severity of injuries in case of an acci-

dent.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in

the event of an accident and to

achieve maximum effectiveness of

the restraint system, all passengers

should be sitting up and the front and

rear seats should be in an upright

position when the vehicle is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down

in the rear seat or if the front and rear

seats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

WARNING - Pinched

seat belt

Make sure that the webbing

and/or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear

seat when returning the rear

seatback to its upright position.

A caught or pinched

webbing/buckle may become

damaged and could fail during a

collision or sudden stop.

329

Safety features of your vehicle

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected

periodically for wear or damage of

any kind. Any damaged parts should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry. If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solu-

tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,

strong detergents or abrasives

should not be used because they

may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly

or assemblies should be replaced if

the vehicle has been involved in an

accident.This should be done even if

no damage is visible. Additional

questions concerning seat belt oper-

ation should be directed to an

authorized Kia dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

303

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the vehicle should

sit in the rear seat and must always

be properly restrained to minimize

the risk of injury in an accident, sud-

den stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in

the front seat. Larger children not in

a child restraint should use one of

the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant safety seats must be

properly placed and installed in the

rear seat. You must use a commer-

cially available child restraint system

that meets the requirements of the

Safety Standards of your country.

Child restraint systems are designed

to be secured in vehicle seats by the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,

or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH

anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in

a crash if their restraints are not

properly secured. For small children

and babies, a child seat or infant seat

must be used. Before buying a par-

ticular child restraint system, make

sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat

belts, and fits your child.

Follow all the instructions provided

by the manufacturer when installing

the child restraint system.

A child restraint system can become

very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle

on a sunny day. Be sure to check the

seat cover, buckles and latches

before placing a child in the restraint

system.

When the child restraint system is

not in use, store it in the luggage

area or fasten it with a seat belt so

that it will not be thrown forward in

case of a sudden stop or an acci-

dent.

WARNING - Restraint

location

Never install a child or infant

seat on the front passenger's

seat. A child riding in the front

passenger seat can be forceful-

ly struck by an inflating airbag.

331

Safety features of your vehicle

After an accident, have an author-

ized Kia dealer check the child

restraint system, seat belt, tether

anchor and lower anchor.

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the

use of a child seat or infant seat is

required.The child seat or infant seat

should be of appropriate size for the

child and should be installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

WARNING

- Holding children

Never hold a child in your arms

or lap when riding in a vehicle.

The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child

from your arms and throw the

child against the car’s interior.

Always use a child restraint

system which is appropriate for

your child's height and weight.

WARNING - Unattended

Children

Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle.The car can heat up

very quickly, resulting in injuries

to the child in the vehicle.

WARNING - Seat belt use

Do not use one seat belt for two

occupants at the same time.

This will eliminate any safety

benefit provided by the seat belt

to the occupants.

CRS09

OUN026150

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Safety features of your vehicle

323

For safety reasons, we recommend

that the child restraint system be

used in the rear seats.

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger seat,

because of the danger an inflating

passenger-side air bag could impact

the rear-facing child restraint and kill

the child.

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and

only lock under extreme or emer-

gency conditions (emergency lock

mode), you must manually change

these seat belts to the auto lock

mode to secure a child restraint.

If the seat belt does not operate as

described in this section, have the

system checked immediately by your

authorized Kia dealer.

Placing a passenger seat belt

into the auto lock mode

The auto lock mode will help prevent

the normal movement of the child in

the vehicle from causing the seat belt

to loosen and compromise the child

restraint system. To secure a child

restraint system, use the following

procedure.

E2MS103005

WARNING - Child seat

installation

• Always follow the instructions

provided by the child restraint

system manufacturer. Child

restraint system manufactur-

ers know their products best.

• Failure to observe this manu-

al's instructions regarding

child restraint system and the

instructions provided with the

child restraint system could

result in the improper installa-

tion of the child restraint sys-

tem which may reduce the

protection to your child in a

crash or a sudden stop.

• If the vehicle headrest pre-

vents proper installation of a

child seat (as described in the

child seat system manual), the

headrest of the respective

seating position shall be read-

justed or entirely removed.

333

Safety features of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on

the outboard or center rear seats, do

the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoul-

der belt around or through the

restraint, following the restraint

manufacturer’s instructions. Be

sure the seat belt webbing is not

twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that it

is easy to access in case of an emer-

gency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the

seat belt all the way out. When the

shoulder portion of the seat belt is

fully extended, it will shift the

retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child

restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion

of the seat belt to retract and listen

for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-

ing” sound. This indicates that the

retractor is in the “Auto Lock”

mode. If no distinct sound is

heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OEN036101 OEN036102 OEN036103

Safety features of your vehicle

343

5. Remove as much slack from the

belt as possible by pushing down

on the child restraint system while

feeding the shoulder belt back into

the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat

belt is holding it firmly in place. If it

is not, release the seat belt and

repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is

in the “Auto Lock” mode by

attempting to pull more of the seat

belt out of the retractor. If you can-

not, the retractor is in the “Auto

Lock” mode.

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock

mode” whenever the belt is allowed

to retract fully. Therefore, the preced-

ing seven steps must be followed

each time a child restraint is

installed.

To remove the child restraint, press

the release button on the buckle and

then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of

the restraint and allow the seat belt

to retract fully. When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position,

the retractor will automatically

switch from the “Auto Lock” mode

to the emergency lock mode for

normal adult usage.

OEN036104

WARNING - Auto lock

mode

Set the retractor to Automatic

Lock mode when installing any

child restraint system. If the

retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child

restraint can move when your

vehicle turns or stops suddenly.

335

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat

with tether anchor system

Child restraint hook holders are

located on the back of the rear seat-

backs.

This symbol indicates the

position of the tether anchor.

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head-

rests, route the tether strap under

the headrest and between the

headrest posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the

seatback. In case of interference

between the child restraint seat

and the headrest remove the par-

ticular head restraint for better fit-

ment of the child restraint seat.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to

the appropriate child restraint

hook holder and tighten to secure

the child restraint seat.

OXM039034N

OPS033019

WARNING -Tether strap

Never mount more than one

child restraint to a single tether

or to a single lower anchorage

point. The increased load

caused by multiple seats may

cause the tethers or anchorage

points to break.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Check that the child restraint system

is secure by pushing and pulling it in

different directions. Incorrectly fitted

child restraints may swing, twist, tip

or separate causing death or serious

injury.

Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers

make child restraint seats that are

labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-

patible child restraint seats. LATCH

stands for "Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children". These seats

include two rigid or webbing mount-

ed attachments that connect to two

LATCH anchors at specific seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

child restraint seat eliminates the

need to use seat belts to attach the

child seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located

on the left and right 2nd row seat

backs to indicate the position of the

lower anchors for child restraints.

OXM039060N

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

OPS034059N

337

Safety features of your vehicle

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback reclined two positions

from the most upright latched posi-

tion.

LATCH anchors have been provided

in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors

are located in the left and right out-

board rear seating positions. Their

locations are shown in the illustra-

tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-

vided for the center rear seating

position.

The LATCH anchors are located

between the seatback and the seat

cushion of the 2nd row seat left and

right outboard seating positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or

LATCH-compatible attachments.

WARNING - Unused rear

seatbelts

Always fasten the seatbelts

behind the child restraint seat

when they are not used to

secure the child seat. Failure to

do so may result in child stran-

gulation.

OXM039036N

Safety features of your vehicle

383

Once you have installed the LATCH

child restraint, assure that the seat is

properly attached to the LATCH and

tether anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat

before you place the child in it. Tilt

the seat from side to side. Also try to

tug the seat forward. Check to see if

the anchors hold the seat in place.

WARNING - LATCH lower

anchors

Never attempt to attach a

LATCH equipped seat in the

center seating position. LATCH

lower anchors are only to be

used with the left and right rear

outboard seating positions.You

may damage the anchors or the

anchors may fail and break in a

collision.

339

Safety features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always

wear the safety belts provided in

order to minimize the risk and sever-

ity of injury in the event of a collision

or rollover.

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. OAM032026

Safety features of your vehicle

403

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON

or START position.

• The appropriate air bags inflate

instantly in the event of a serious

frontal collision or side collision in

order to help protect the occupants

from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which

the air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a

collision and its direction. These

two factors determine whether the

sensors produce an electronic

deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehi-

cles or objects which your vehicle

hits in the collision. The determin-

ing factors are not limited to those

mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to

see the air bags inflate during an

accident.

It is much more likely that you will

simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in serious

side collisions, side and/or curtain

air bags will inflate if the sensing

system detects a rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, cur-

tain air bags will remain inflated

longer to help provide protection

from ejection, especially when

used in conjunction with the seat

belts.

• In order to help provide protection,

the air bags must inflate rapidly.

The speed of the air bag inflation is

a consequence of extremely short

time in which to inflate the air bag

between the occupant and the

vehicle structures before the occu-

pant impacts those structures. This

speed of inflation reduces the risk

of serious or life-threatening

injuries and is thus a necessary

part of the air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which can include

facial abrasions, bruises and bro-

ken bones because the inflation

speed also causes the air bags to

expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the

steering wheel or passenger air

bag can cause fatal injuries,

especially if the occupant is

positioned excessively close to

the steering wheel or passenger

air bag.

341

Safety features of your vehicle

Noise and smoke

When inflated, the air bags make a

loud noise and leave smoke and

powder in the air inside the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the

ignition of the air bag inflator. After

the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-

stantial discomfort in breathing due

to the contact of your chest with both

the seat belt and the air bag, as well

as from breathing the smoke and

powder. Open your doors and/or

windows as soon as possible after

impact in order to reduce discom-

fort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-

toxic, it may cause irritation to the

skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If

this is the case, wash and rinse with

cold water immediately and consult a

doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING

- Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storage

area's internal components

immediately after airbag infla-

tion.The air bag related parts in

the steering wheel, instrument

panel and the roof rails above

the front and rear doors are

very hot. Hot components can

result in burn injuries.

WARNING

- Airbag inflation

Sit as far back as possible from

the steering wheel while still

maintaining comfortable con-

trol of your vehicle. A distance

of at least 10" from your chest

to the steering wheel is recom-

mended. Failure to do so can

result in airbag inflation injuries

to the driver.

Safety features of your vehicle

423

Do not install a child restraint on

the front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger’s

seat. If the air bag deploys, it would

impact the rear-facing child restraint,

causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing

child restraints in the front passen-

ger’s seat either. If the front passen-

ger air bag inflates, it could cause

serious or fatal injuries to the child.

Air bag warning light

The purpose of air bag warning light

in your instrument panel is to alert

you of a potential problem with your

air bag system, which could include

your side and/or curtain air bags

used for rollover protection.

1JBH3051

W7-147

WARNING - Air bag

deployment

When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats of a vehicle

equipped with side and/or cur-

tain air bags, install the child

restraint system as far away

from the door side as possible.

Inflation of the side and/or cur-

tain air bags could impact the

child.

343

Safety features of your vehicle

When the ignition switch is turned

ON, the warning light should illumi-

nate for approximately 6 seconds,

then go off. Have the system

checked by an authorized Kia dealer-

ship if:

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following

components:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator (Front passenger’s seat

only)

11. Occupant detection system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s

seat belt buckle sensors

13. Emergency fastening device

(EFD)

14. Side pressure impact sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require

air bag deployment or pre-tensioner

seat belt deployment.

OPS034060N/Q

Safety features of your vehicle

443

If the air bag warning light illuminat-

ed for more than, 6 seconds after the

ignition is turned on, or of it illumi-

nates during vehicle operation, an

SRS component may not be func-

tioning properly and you should have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized Kia dealer.

If any of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

in the air bag system. Have an

authorized Kia dealer inspect the air

bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position. The front air bag modules are locat-

ed both in the center of the steering

wheel and in the front passenger's

panel above the glove box. When the

SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe

impact to the front of the vehicle, it

will automatically deploy the front air

bags.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

W7-147

345

Safety features of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the

expansion of the air bags. Further

opening of the covers then allows full

inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-

tion with a properly worn seat belt,

slows the driver's or the passenger's

forward motion, reducing the risk of

head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibility

and the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

B240B02L

Driver’s front air bag (2)

B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag (3)

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

- Air bag obstructions

Do not install or place any

accessories on the steering

wheel, instrument panel, or on

the front passenger's panel

above the glove box in a vehi-

cle. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles if the air

bag deploys.

Safety features of your vehicle

463

If an air bag deploys, there may be a

loud noise followed by a fine dust

released in the vehicle. These condi-

tions are normal and are not haz-

ardous - the air bags are packed in

this fine powder. The dust generated

during air bag deployment may

cause skin or eye irritation as well as

aggravate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin areas

thoroughly with lukewarm water and

a mild soap after an accident in

which the air bags were deployed.

The SRS can function only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate, or continuously

remains on after illuminating for

about 6 seconds when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position,

or after the engine is started, comes

on while driving, the SRS is not

working properly. If this occurs, have

your vehicle immediately inspected

by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

Before you replace a fuse or discon-

nect a battery terminal, turn the

ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the ignition switch.

Never remove or replace the air bag

related fuse(s) when the ignition

switch is in the ON position. Failure

to observe this warning will cause

the SRS air bag warning light to illu-

minate.

Occupant Detection System

(ODS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an

occupant detection system in the

front passenger's seat.

The occupant detection system is

designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated front passenger and

determine if the passenger's front air

bag should be enabled (may inflate)

or not. Only the front passenger front

air bag is controlled by the Occupant

Detection System.

Do not put anything in front of the

passenger air bag indicator.

WARNING - Flying

objects

Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

airbag inflates.

OPS033020

347

Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of the occu-

pant detection system

• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.

• An electronic system which deter-

mines whether the passenger air

bag systems should be activated

or deactivated.

• A indicator light located on the

instrument panel which illuminates

the words PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicating the front passen-

ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warn-

ing light is interconnected with the

occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occu-

pied by a person that the system

determines to be of appropriate size,

and he/she sits properly (sitting

upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the

seat cushion with their seat belt on,

legs comfortably extended and their

feet on the floor), the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off

and the front passenger's air bag will

be able to inflate, if necessary, in

frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR

BAG “OFF” indicator on the center

facia panel. This system detects the

conditions 1~4 in the following table

and activates or deactivates the front

passenger air bag based on these

conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehi-

cle occupants are seated and

restrained properly (sitting upright

with the seat in an upright position,

centered on the seat cushion, with

the person’s legs comfortably extend-

ed, feet on the floor, and wearing the

safety belt properly) for the most

effective protection by the air bag and

the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant Detection

System) may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which

can defeat the detection system.

These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or cen-

ter console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locations

which reduce the passenger

weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety

belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear

or hip protection wear.

(8) Put on the seat an additional thick

cushion.

Safety features of your vehicle

483

✽✽NOTICE

Do not modify or replace the front

passenger seat. Don't place anything

on or attach anything such as a blan-

ket, front seat cover or after market

seat heater to the front passenger

seat. This can adversely affect the

occupant detection system.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection

system

*1: The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the

air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,

thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride

in the front passenger seat.

*2: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

Condition detected by the

occupant detection

system

1. Adult or child*1

2. Child restraint system*2

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a malfunction

in the system

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

"PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator

light

SRS warning light

Front passenger

air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

WARNING -ODS System

Riding in an improper position

adversely affects the Occupant

Detection System and may

result in the deactivation of the

front passenger airbag. It is

important for the driver to

instruct the passenger as to the

proper seating instructions as

contained in this manual.

(Continued)

349

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted

towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or cen-

ter console.

- Never sit on one side of the

front passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-

board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load or an

active electronic device on

the front passenger seat or

seatback pocket.

- Never excessively recline the

front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front

passenger seatback.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

503

When an adult is seated in the front

passenger seat, if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and ask the passenger to sit

properly (sitting upright with the seat

back in an upright position, centered

on the seat cushion with their seat

belt on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor). Restart

the engine and have the person

remain in that position. This will allow

the system to detect the person and

to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator is still on, ask the passen-

ger to move to the rear seat.

✽✽NOTICE

The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position or after

the engine is started. If the front

passenger seat is occupied, the occu-

pant detection sensor will then clas-

sify the front passenger after several

more seconds.

B990A01O

Proper position

WARNING - “AIR BAG

OFF” light

Do not allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front seat when the

PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator is illuminated, because

the air bag will not deploy in the

event of a crash. The driver

must instruct the passenger to

reposition himself in the seat.

Failure to properly position

yourself may lead to air bag

deactivation resulting in air bag

non-deployment in a collision. If

the PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicator remains illumi-

nated after the passenger repo-

sitions themselves properly and

the car is restarted, it is recom-

mended that passenger move to

the rear seat because the pas-

senger's front air bag will not

deploy.

351

Safety features of your vehicle

Any child age 12 and under should

ride in the rear seat. Children too

large for child restraints should use

the available lap/shoulder belts. No

matter what type of crash, children of

all ages are safer when restrained in

the rear seat.

If the occupant detection system is

not working properly, the SRS air

bag warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate because the

passenger's front air bag is connect-

ed with the occupant detection sys-

tem. If there is a malfunction of the

occupant detection system, the PAS-

SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator

will not illuminate and the passen-

ger's front air bag will inflate in frontal

impact crashes even if there is no

occupant in the front passenger's

seat

Driver's and passenger's front

air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder

belts at both the driver and passen-

ger seating position.

OPS033021

OPS033022

Driver’s front air bag

Passenger’s front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

523

The indication of the system's pres-

ence are the letters "AIR BAG"

embossed on the air bag pad cover

on the steering wheel and the pas-

senger's side front panel pad above

the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags

installed under the pad covers in the

center of the steering wheel and the

passenger's side front panel above

the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle's driver and/or the front

passenger with additional protection

than that offered by the seat belt sys-

tem alone in case of a frontal impact

of sufficient severity. The SRS uses

sensors to gather information about

the driver's and front passenger's

seat belt usage and impact severity.

The seat belt buckle sensors deter-

mine if the driver and front passen-

ger's seat belts are fastened.

These sensors provide the ability to

control the SRS deployment based on

whether or not the seat belts are fas-

tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability

to control the air bag inflation with

two levels. A first stage level is pro-

vided for moderate-severity impacts.

A second stage level is provided for

more severe impacts.

The passenger’s front air bag is

designed to help reduce the injury of

children sitting close to the instru-

ment panel in low speed collisions.

However, children are safer if they

are restrained in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity and

seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS

Control Module) controls the air bag

inflation. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

CAUTION - Seat Track

Sensor

Do not place any objects under-

neath the front seats as they

could damage the seat track

position sensor or interfere with

the occupant detection system.

WARNING- Replacement /

modifications

The front passenger seat, dash-

board or door should not be

replaced except by an authorized

Kia dealer using original Kia parts

designed for this vehicle and

model. Any other such replace-

ment or modification could

adversely affect the operation of

the occupant detection system

and your advanced air bags.

353

Safety features of your vehicle

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped

with an occupant detection system in

the front passenger's seat.The occu-

pant detection system detects the

presence of a passenger in the front

passenger's seat and will turn off the

front passenger's air bag under cer-

tain conditions. For more detail, see

"Occupant detection system" in this

section.

Manufacturers are required by gov-

ernment regulations to provide a

contact point concerning modifica-

tions to the vehicle for persons with

disabilities, which modifications may

affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag

system. However, Kia does not

endorse nor will it support any

changes to any part or structure of

the vehicle that could affect the

advanced air bag system, including

the occupant detection system.

Advanced air bags are combined

with pre-tensioner seat belts to help

provide enhanced occupant protec-

tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags

are not intended to deploy in colli-

sions in which sufficient protection

can be provided by the pre-tensioner

seat belt.

WARNING - Modification

Modification to the seat struc-

ture can cause the air bag to

deploy at a different level than

should be provided.

WARNING - Replacement /

Modifications

The front passenger seat, dash-

board or door should not be

replaced except by an authorized

Kia dealer using original Kia parts

designed for this vehicle and

model. Any other such replace-

ment or modification could

adversely affect the operation of

the occupant detection system

and your advanced air bags.

Safety features of your vehicle

543

Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or

rollover crashes. In addition, front air

bags will not deploy in frontal crash-

es below the deployment threshold.

Side air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

air bag in each front seat. The pur-

pose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-

senger with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt alone.

WARNING - SRS Wiring

Do not tamper with or discon-

nect SRS wiring or other com-

ponents of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in injury,

due to accidental deployment of

the air bags or by rendering the

SRS inoperative. OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

1VQA2091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

OPS033037

OPS033023

❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

355

Safety features of your vehicle

• The side air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side-impact

collisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

• The side and/or curtain air bags do

not only deploy on the side of the

impact but also on the opposite

side.

• The side and/or curtain air bags on

both sides of the vehicle will deploy

if a rollover or possible rollover is

detected.

• The side air bags are not designed

to deploy in all side impact or

rollover situations.

The side air bag is supplemental to

the driver's and the passenger's seat

belt systems and is not a substitute

for them. Therefore your seat belts

must be worn at all times while the

vehicle is in mention.

For best protection from the side air

bag system and to avoid being

injured by the deploying side air bag,

both front seat occupants should sit

in an upright position with the seat

belt properly fastened. The driver's

hands should be placed on the steer-

ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-

tions. The passenger's arms and

hands should be placed on their

laps.

If seat or seat cover is damaged,

have the vehicle checked and

repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

Inform the dealer that your vehicle is

equipped with side air bags and an

occupant detection system.

WARNING - Unexpected

deployment

Avoid impact to the side impact

airbag sensor when the ignition

switch is ON to prevent unex-

pected deployment of the side

impact air bag.

WARNING - Deployment

Do not install any accessories

including seat covers, on the

side or near the side impact air

bag as this may affect the

deployment of the side air bags.

WARNING - Flying

objects

Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

airbag inflates.

Safety features of your vehicle

563

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect

occupants in certain side impacts

and to help prevent them from eject-

ing out of the vehicle as a result of a

rollover, especially when the seat-

belts are also in use.

• The curtain air bags are designed

to deploy during certain side

impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and

point of impact.

• The side and/or curtain air bags

do not only deploy on the side of

the impact but also on the opposite

side.

• Also, the curtain air bags on both

sides of the vehicle will deploy in

certain rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are not

designed to deploy in all side

impact or rollover situations.

Do not allow the passengers to lean

their heads or bodies against the

doors, put their arms on the doors,

stretch their arms out of the window

or place objects between the doors

and passengers when they are seat-

ed on seats equipped with side

impact and/or curtain air bags.

✽✽NOTICE

Never try to open or repair any com-

ponents of the side and curtain air

bag system. This should only be

done by an authorized Kia dealer.

❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

OPS033024

OPS033038

357

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents

in which the air bag would not be

expected to provide additional

protection.

These include rear impacts, sec-

ond or third collisions in multiple

impact accidents, as well as low

speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side pressure sensor

OPS033025N/OPS033026/OPS033027/OPS033028/OPS033029

123 4

Safety features of your vehicle

583

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the front

bumper, front end module, body or

front doors and/or B pillar where

side collision sensors are installed.

Have the vehicle checked and

repaired by an authorized Kia deal-

er.

• Installing bumper guards (or side

step or running board) or replacing

a bumper (or front door module)

with non-genuine parts may

adversely affect your vehicle’s col-

lision and air bag deployment per-

formance.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate

in a frontal collision depending on

the intensity, speed or angles of

impact of the front collision.

1VQA2084

WARNING

- Air bag sensors

• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where

air bags or sensors are

installed.

This may cause unexpected

air bag deployment, which

could result in serious per-

sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered

in any way, the air bags may

deploy when they should not

or they may not deploy when

they should.

Therefore, do not try to per-

form maintenance on or

around the air bag sensors.

Have the vehicle checked and

repaired by an authorized Kia

dealer.

359

Safety features of your vehicle

Side air/or curtain air bags

Side air bags (side and/or curtain air

bags) are designed to inflate when an

impact is detected by side collision

sensors depending on the strength,

speed or angles of impact resulting

from a side impact collision.

Also, the side and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when a rollover is

detected by a rollover sensor.

Although the front air bags (driver’s

and front passenger’s air bags) are

designed to inflate in frontal colli-

sions, they also may inflate in other

types of collisions if the front impact

sensors detect a sufficient frontal

force in another type of impact. Side

and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in certain side impact colli-

sions. They may inflate in other type

of collisions where a side force is

detected by the sensors. Side air bag

and/or curtain air bags may also

inflate where rollover sensors indi-

cate the possibility of a rollover

occurring (even if none actually

occurs) or in other situations, incluid-

ing when the vehicle is tilted while

being towed. Even where side and/or

curtain air bags would not provide

impact protection in a rollover, how-

ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec-

tion of occupants, especially those

who are restrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle

traffic to prevent unintended air bag

deployment.

OVQ036018N

OPS033039

❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

Safety features of your vehicle

603

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the

air bags may not deploy. The air

bags are designed not to deploy in

such cases because they may not

provide benefits beyond the pro-

tection of the seat belts in such col-

lisions.

• Air bags are not designed to inflate

in rear collisions, because occu-

pants are moved backward by the

force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not be able

to provide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in

side impact collisions, because

occupants move to the direction of

the collision, and thus in side

impacts, frontal air bag deployment

would not provide additional occu-

pant protection.

OUN036087 OVQ036018N

1VQA2086

361

Safety features of your vehicle

• In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in

a direction where the air bags

would not be able to provide any

additional benefit, and thus the

sensors may not deploy any air

bags.

• Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehi-

cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-

cle with a higher ground clearance.

Air bags may not inflate in this

"under-ride" situation because

deceleration forces that are detect-

ed by sensors may be significantly

reduced by such “under-ride” colli-

sions.

• Front air bags may not inflate in

rollover accidents because front

airbag deployment would not pro-

vide additional occupant protection.

1VQA2090 1VQA20911VQA2089

Safety features of your vehicle

623

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-

cle collides with objects such as

utility poles or trees, where the

point of impact is concentrated to

one area and the full force of the

impact is not delivered to the sen-

sors.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-

free and so there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate, or continuously remains on,

have your vehicle immediately

inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such

as removing, installing, repairing, or

any work on the steering wheel, the

front passenger’s panel, front seats

and roof rails must be performed by

an authorized Kia dealer. Improper

handling of the SRS system may

result in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers,

use only a soft, dry cloth or one

which has been moistened with plain

water. Solvents or cleaners could

adversely affect the air bag covers

and proper deployment of the sys-

tem.

If components of the air bag system

must be discarded, or if the vehicle

must be scrapped, certain safety

precautions must be observed. An

authorized Kia dealer knows these

precautions and can give you the

necessary information. Failure to fol-

low these precautions and proce-

dures could increase the risk of per-

sonal injury.

1VQA2092

363

Safety features of your vehicle

Adding equipment to or modi-

fying your air bag-equipped

vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some

required by the Canada Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),

are attached to the sunvisor to alert

the driver and passengers of poten-

tial risks of the air bag system.

WARNING - Tampering

with SRS

Do not tamper with or discon-

nect SRS wiring, or other com-

ponents of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in the

accidental inflation of the air

bags or by rendering the SRS

inoperative.

WARNING - Towing

Vehicle

Always have the ignition off

when your vehicle is being

towed. The side air bags may

inflate if the vehicle is tilted

such as when being towed

because of the rollover sensors

in the vehicle.

OPS033030

OAM039041

Features of your vehicle

Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-19

• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-20

• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Panoramic sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

• Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• FLEX steer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

• Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Interior lamp AUTO cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

• Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

• Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

• Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• Seat warmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

• Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147

• Aux, USB and iPod®port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148

• Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number

The key code num-

ber is stamped on

the key code tag

attached to the key

set. Should you

lose your keys, this number will

enable an authorized Kia dealer to

duplicate the keys easily. Remove

the key code tag and store it in a safe

place. Also, record the key code

number and keep it in a safe and

handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

• To unfold the key, press the release

button (1) then the key will unfold

automatically. To fold the key, fold

the key manually while pressing

the release button (1).

KEY

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without

pressing the release button.

This may damage the key.

WARNING - Aftermarket

key

Use only Kia original parts for

the ignition key in your vehicle.

If an aftermarket key is used,

the ignition switch may not

return to ON after START. If this

happens, the starter will contin-

ue to operate causing damage

to the starter motor and possi-

ble fire due to excessive current

in the wiring.

OED036001A

OXMA043331

■Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

Door Lock (1)

1. Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).

3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The

hazard warning lights will blink

once.

4. If the lock button is pressed once

more within 4 seconds, the hazard

warning lights will blink and the

horn will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked by

checking the door lock button inside

or pulling the outside door handle.

Door Unlock (2)

1. Press the unlock button(2).

2. The driver's door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice

within 4 seconds and all doors and

tailgate will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink two times.

✽✽NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

OXMA043317

WARNING - Ignition

key(smart key)

Never leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren. Leaving children unat-

tended in a vehicle with a man-

ual ignition key or a smart key

is dangerous. Children copy

adults and they could place the

key in the ignition switch or

press the start button. The key

would enable children to oper-

ate power windows or other

controls, or even make the vehi-

cle move, which could result in

serious bodily injury or death.

result in serious bodily injury or

death.

Features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlock (3)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button

is pressed for more than 1 second.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and

then closed, the tailgate will be

locked automatically.

Panic (4)

The horn sounds and hazard warn-

ing lights flash for about 30 seconds

if this button is pressed for more than

1 second.To stop the horn and lights,

press any button except the trunk

button on the transmitter.

Transmitter precautions

✽✽NOTICE

• The transmitter will not work if any

of following occur:

- The ignition key is in the ignition

switch.

- You exceed the operating dis-

tance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

- The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

- The weather is extremely cold.

- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sub-

station or an airport which can

interfere with normal operation of

the transmitter.

• When the transmitter does not

work correctly, open and close the

door with the ignition key. If you

have a problem with the transmit-

ter, contact an authorized Kia deal-

er.

(Continued)

• If the transmitter is in close proxim-

ity to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when

the phone is active such as making

and receiving calls, text messag-

ing, and/or sending/receiving

emails. Avoid placing the transmit-

ter and your mobile phone in the

same pants or jacket pocket and

always try to maintain an adequate

distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid as it can

become damaged and not func-

tion properly.

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoper-

ative due to exposure to water or liq-

uids, it will not be covered by your

manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium

battery which will normally last for

several years. When replacement is

necessary, use the following proce-

dure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmitter

center cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new

battery (CR2032). When replacing

the battery, make sure the battery

is positioned battery.

3. Install the battery in the reverse

order of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an

authorized Kia dealer for transmitter

reprogramming.

• The transmitter is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use, how-

ever it can malfunction if exposed to

moisture or static electricity. If you

are unsure how to use your trans-

mitter or replace the battery, contact

an authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause

the transmitter to malfunction. Be

sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter,

don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it

to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and may cause

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) or regulation.

OYDDCO2005

Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an

electronic engine immobilizer system

to reduce the risk of unauthorized

vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is com-

prised of a small transponder in the

ignition key and electronic devices

inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, when-

ever you insert your ignition key into

the ignition switch and turn it to ON,

it checks and determines and verifies

if the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid,

the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid,

the engine will not start.

To activate the immobilizer sys-

tem:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-

tion. The immobilizer system acti-

vates automatically. Without a valid

ignition key for your vehicle, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer

system:

Insert the ignition key into the key

cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

In order to prevent theft of your vehi-

cle, do not leave spare keys any-

where in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a customer

unique password and should be kept

confidential. Do not leave this num-

ber anywhere in your vehicle.

CAUTION - Transmitter

damage

Do not drop, wet or expose the

keyless entry system transmit-

ter to heat or sunlight.

IC WARNING

This device complies with

Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, includ-

ing interference that may cause

undesired operation of the

device.

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use

the key with other immobilizer keys

around. Otherwise the engine may

not start or may stop soon after it

starts. Keep each key separate in

order to avoid a starting malfunc-

tion.

Do not put metal accessories near

the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the

transponder signal and may prevent

the engine from being started.

✽✽NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose

your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

✽✽NOTICE

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to changes

or modifications not approved by

the party responsible for compli-

ance, it will not be covered by your

manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION - Immobilizer

damage

Do not expose your immobilizer

system to moisture, static elec-

tricity and rough handling. This

may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer

alterations

Do not change, alter or adjust

the immobilizer system because

it could cause the immobilizer

system to malfunction.

Features of your vehicle

104

Limp home (override) proce-

dure

When you turn the ignition switch to

the ON position, if the immobilizer

indicator ( ) goes off after blink-

ing 5 times, your transponder

equipped in the ignition key is out of

order. You cannot start the engine

without the limp home procedure. To

start the engine, you have to input

your password by using the ignition

switch. Your password is only avail-

able from an authorized Kia dealer-

ship. Contact an authorized dealer

for more information.

The following procedure is how to

input your password of “2345” as an

example.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. The immobilizer indicator

( ) will blink 5 times and go off

indicating the beginning of the limp

home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC

position.

3. To enter the first digit (in this

example “2”), turn the ignition

switch to the ON and ACC position

twice. Perform the same proce-

dure for the next digits between 3

seconds and 10 seconds (for

example, for “3”, turn the ignition

ON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been input

successfully, you have to start the

engine within 30 seconds. If you

attempt to start the engine after 30

seconds, the engine will not start

and you will have to input your

password again.

After performing the limp home pro-

cedure, you have to see an author-

ized Kia dealer immediately to

inspect and repair your ignition key

or immobilizer system.

411

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number

The key code num-

ber is stamped on

the key code tag

attached to the key

set. Should you

lose your keys, this number will

enable an authorized Kia dealer to

duplicate the keys easily. Remove

the key code tag and store it in a safe

place. Also, record the key code

number and keep it in a safe and

handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Smart key function

To remove the mechanical key, press

and hold the release button(1) and

remove the mechanical key (2).

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

With a smart key, you can lock or

unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start

the engine.

Refer to the following for more

details.

SMART KEY

OXMA043316

Features of your vehicle

124

Door Lock

Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

3. Press the button of the outside

door handle.

4. The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked

by pulling the outside door handle.

• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 0.7~1m

(28~40 in. ) from the outside door

handle.

• Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will

not lock and the chime will sound

for 3 seconds if any of following

occur:

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

- The engine start/stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

- Any door except the tailgate is

open.

Using the button on the smart key

1 Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).

3. The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once.

4. Make sure that doors are locked

by pulling the outside door handle.

OXMA043316/Q

OPS043010

413

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking

Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Press the button of the driver's

outside door handle.

3. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink and

the chime will sound two times.

4. Press the button twice within 4

seconds and all doors and the tail-

gate will unlock and the hazard

warning lights will blink and the

chime will sound two times.

• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 0.7~1m

(28~40 in. ) from the outside door

handle.

• When the smart key is recognized

in the area of 0.7~1m (28~40 in.)

from the front outside door handle,

other people can also open the

doors.

• After unlocking the driver’s door or

all doors, the door(s) will lock auto-

matically unless the door is

opened.

Using the button on the smart key

1. Press the unlock button(2) of the

smart key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink and

the chime will sound two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice

within 4 seconds and all doors and

the tailgate will unlock.The hazard

warning lights will blink and the

chime will sound two times.

✽✽NOTICE

After pressing the button, the doors

will lock automatically unless any

door is opened within 30 seconds.

✽✽NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

Features of your vehicle

144

Tailgate unlocking

Using the tailgate handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Press the tailgate handle button.

3. When all doors are locked, the

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

Once the tailgate is opened and

then closed, the tailgate will lock

automatically.

If you are within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)

from the outside tailgate handle, with

your smart key in possession, the

tailgate will unlock and open when

you press the tailgate handle switch.

Using the button on the smart key

1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)

for more than 1 second.

2. When all doors are locked, the

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

Panic

1. Press the panic button(4) for more

than 1 second.

2.The horn sounds and hazard

warning light flash for about 30

seconds.

Start-up

You can start the engine without

inserting the key. For detailed infor-

mation refer to the “Engine start/stop

button” in chapter 5.

Loss of the smart key

A maximum of 2 smart keys can be

registered to a single vehicle.

If you happen to lose your smart key,

you will not be able to start the

engine. You should immediately take

the vehicle and remaining key to your

authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-

cle, if necessary) to protect it from

potential theft.

415

Features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions

• The smart key will not work if any

of the following occur:

- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-

tion or an airport which can inter-

fere with normal operation of the

smart key.

- The smart key is near a mobile

two way radio system or a cellu-

lar phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is

being operated close to your

vehicle.

• When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key and contact

an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximi-

ty to your cell phone or smart

phone, the signal from the smart

key could be blocked by normal

operation of your cell phone or

smart phone. This is especially

important when the phone is active

such as making a call, receiving

calls, text messaging, and/or send-

ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing

the smart key and your cell phone

or smart phone in the same pants

or jacket pocket and maintain ade-

quate distance between the two

devices.

✽✽NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoper-

ative due to exposure to water or liq-

uids, it will not be covered by your

manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid as it can

become damaged and not func-

tion properly.

Features of your vehicle

164

Smart key immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an

electronic engine immobilizer system

to reduce the risk of unauthorized

vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is com-

prised of a small transponder in the

smart key and electronic devices

inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, when-

ever you turn the engine start/stop

button to the ON position by pressing

the button while carrying the smart

key, it checks and determines and

verifies if the smart key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid,

the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid,

the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer

system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to

the ON position by pressing the but-

ton while carrying the smart key.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to

the OFF position. The immobilizer

system activates automatically.

Without a valid smart key for your

vehicle, the engine will not start.

In order to prevent theft of your vehi-

cle, do not leave spare keys any-

where in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a customer

unique password and should be kept

confidential. Do not leave this num-

ber anywhere in your vehicle.

✽✽NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use

the key with other immobilizer keys

around. Otherwise the engine may

not start or may stop soon after it

starts. Keep each key separate in

order to avoid a starting malfunction.

Do not put metal accessories near

the smart key.

The engine may not start because

the metal accessories may interrupt

the transponder signal from transmit-

ting normally.

✽✽NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose

your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

417

Features of your vehicle

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

✽✽NOTICE

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to changes

or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible

for compliance, it will not be cov-

ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle

warranty.

Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last for

several years, but if the smart key is

not working properly, try replacing

the battery with a new one. If you are

unsure how to use your smart key or

replace the battery, contact an

authorized Kia dealer.

1. Remove the mechanical key.

2. Pry open the rear cover.

3. Replace the battery with a new

battery (CR2032). When replacing

the battery, make sure the battery

position.

OPS043002

CAUTION - Immobilizer

damage

Do not expose your immobilizer

system to moisture, static elec-

tricity and rough handling. This

may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer

alterations

Do not change, alter or adjust

the immobilizer system because

it could cause the immobilizer

system to malfunction.

Features of your vehicle

184

4. Install the battery in the reverse

order of removal.

• The smart key is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use, how-

ever it can malfunction if exposed

to moisture or static electricity. If

you are unsure how to use or

replace the battery, contact an

authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause

the smart key to malfunction. Be

sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key,

don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it

to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Smart key

damage

Do not drop, get wet or expose

the smart key to heat or sun-

light, or it will be damaged.

IC WARNING

This device complies with

Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, includ-

ing interference that may cause

undesired operation of the

device.

419

Features of your vehicle

DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from

outside the vehicle

• Turn the key clockwise to lock and

counterclockwise to unlock.

• If you lock the driver's door with a

key

- all vehicle doors will lock auto-

matically. (for normal key)

- only the driver's door will lock. (for

folding key, smart key)

• From the driver's door

- turn the key to the left once to

unlock the door and once more

within 4 seconds to unlock all

doors. (for normal key).

- turn the key to the left once to

unlock the driver's door. (for fold-

ing key, smart key.

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

• When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure the doors

are closed securely.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not

work properly due to freezing con-

ditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked

multiple times in rapid succession

with either the vehicle key or door

lock switch, the system may stop

operating temporarily in order to

protect the circuit and prevent

damage to system components.

OPS043011

Lock

Unlock

■ Type A ■ Type B

Unlock

Features of your vehicle

204

• To lock a door without the key,

push the inside door lock button (1)

or central door lock switch (2) to

the “Lock” position and close the

door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch (2), all vehicle

doors will lock automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from

inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-

tion.The red mark (2) on the button

will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Lock” position. If

the door is locked properly, the red

mark (2) on the door lock button

will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the dri-

ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is

pulled when the door lock button is

in the lock position, the button will

unlock and the door will open. (if

equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

ignition key is in the ignition switch

and any front door is opened.

OPS043012

OPS043013

Lock

Unlock

421

Features of your vehicle

If a power door lock ever fails to func-

tion while you are in the vehicle, try

one or more of the following tech-

niques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

• Move to the cargo area and open

the tailgate.

With central door lock switch

Operate by pressing the central door

lock switch.

• When pressing the front portion (1)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will

lock.

• When pressing the rear portion (2)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will

unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch

and any front door is opened, the

doors will not lock even though the

front portion (1) of the central door

lock switch is pressed.

OPS043014

Driver’s door

OPS043015

Passenger’s door

Features of your vehicle

224

Impact sensing door unlock

system

In the event of air bag deployment

resulting from a vehicle impact, all

doors will automatically unlock.

Auto door lock/unlock feature

(if equipped)

• All doors will automatically lock

when the transaxle shift lever is

shifted out of P(Park).

• All doors will automatically unlock

when the transaxle shift lever is

shifted into P (Park).

Speed sensing door lock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked

after the vehicle speed exceeds 15

km/h (9.3 mph). And all doors will be

automatically unlocked when you

turn the engine off or when you

remove the ignition key.

✽✽NOTICE

You can select some auto door

lock/unlock features in “User

Settings” as follows;

• Speed sensing auto door lock

• Auto door unlock when the igni-

tion key is removed from the igni-

tion switch or engine is turned off.

• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting

the shift lever out of P(Park) or

into P(Park).

For more information, refer to

“User Settings” in this chapter.

WARNING

-Unattended children/ani-

mals

Never leave children or animals

unattended in your vehicle. An

enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended

children or animals who cannot

escape the vehicle.

WARNING - Doors

The doors should always be

fully closed and locked while

the vehicle is in motion to pre-

vent accidental opening of the

door.

423

Features of your vehicle

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children from acciden-

tally opening the rear doors from

inside the vehicle. The rear door

safety locks should be used whenev-

er children are in the vehicle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located

on the rear edge of the door to the

lock ( ) position. When the child

safety lock is in the lock position, the

rear door will not open even when

the inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the out-

side door handle.

Even though the doors may be

unlocked, the rear door will not open

by pulling the inner door handle (1)

until the rear door child safety lock is

unlocked.

OPS043016

WARNING - Rear door

locks

Use the rear door safety locks

whenever children are in the

vehicle. If a child accidently

opens the rear doors while the

vehicle is motion, he can fall out.

Features of your vehicle

244

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or

unlocked with the key, transmitter

(or smart key) or central door lock

switch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be

opened by pressing the handle

switch and then pulling the handle

up.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the

tailgate unlock button on the smart

key is pressed (if equipped). Once

the tailgate is opened and then

closed, the tailgate is locked auto-

matically.

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when opening

the tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure

that the tailgate is securely latched.

Make sure your hands, feet and

other parts of your body are safely

out of the way before closing the tail-

gate.

TAILGATE

CAUTION - Tailgate lift

Make certain that you close the

tailgate before driving your

vehicle. Possible damage may

occur to the tailgate lift cylin-

ders and attached hardware if

the tailgate is not closed prior to

driving.

OPS043017 OPS043018

425

Features of your vehicle

Emergency tailgate safety

release

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emergency tailgate safety release

lever located on the bottom of the

tailgate. When someone is inadver-

tently locked in the cargo area, the

tailgate can be opened by pushing

the release lever and pushing open

the tailgate.

WARNING

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the cargo area of the

vehicle at any time. The cargo

area is a very dangerous loca-

tion in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for

emergencies only. Use with

extreme caution, especially

while the vehicle is in motion.

OPS043019

WARNING - Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in

the rear cargo area where no

restraints are available.

Occupants should always be

properly restrained.

CAUTION - Exhaust

fumes

Driving with the tailgate open is

not advisable. Dangerous

exhaust fumes can enter the

passenger compartment. If you

must drive with the tailgate

opened, keep the air vents and

all windows open so that addi-

tional outside air can enter.

Features of your vehicle

264

(1) Driver’s door power window

switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window

up/down

(7) Power window lock switch

In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OPS043020

427

Features of your vehicle

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window

switch that controls the door's win-

dow. The driver has a power window

lock button which can block the oper-

ation of the rear passenger windows.

The power windows can be operated

for approximately 30 seconds after

the ignition key is removed or turned

to the ACC or LOCK position.

However, if the front doors are

opened, the power windows cannot

be operated even within the 30 sec-

ond period.

✽✽NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows

down or with the sunroof (if

equipped) in an open (or partially

open) position, your vehicle may

demonstrate a wind buffeting or

pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-

mal occurrence and can be reduced

or eliminated by taking the follow-

ing actions. If the noise occurs with

one or both of the rear windows

down, partially lower both front

windows approximately one inch. If

you experience the noise with the

sunroof open, slightly reduce the

size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

The driver’s door has a master power

window switch that controls all the

windows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press

down or pull up the front portion of

the corresponding switch to the first

detent position (5).

OPS043021

Features of your vehicle

284

Auto down window (if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent

position (6) completely lowers the

driver’s window even when the

switch is released. To stop the win-

dow at the desired position while the

window is in operation, momentarily

pull up the switch to the opposite

direction of the window movement.

Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or raises the window even

when the switch is released. To stop

the window at the desired position

while the window is in operation, pull

up or press down and release the

switch.

If the power window does not oper-

ate normally, the automatic power

window system must be reset as fol-

lows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the driver’s window and

continue pulling up the driver’s

power window switch for at least 1

second after the window is com-

pletely closed.

OPS043203

OPS043022

429

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the win-

dow is blocked by an object or part of

the body, the window will detect the

resistance and will stop upward

movement. The window will then

lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)

to allow the object to be cleared.

The distance may vary based on the

size or position of the window. If the

window detects the resistance while

the power window switch is pulled up

continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower

approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).

And if the power window switch is

pulled up continuously again within 5

seconds after the window is lowered

by the automatic window reversal

feature, the automatic window rever-

sal will not operate.

The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active when

the “auto up” feature is used by fully

pulling up the switch. The automatic

reverse feature will not operate if the

window is raised using the halfway

position on the power window switch.

OUN026013

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to

avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

If an object less than 0.16 in. (4

mm) in diameter is caught

between the window glass and

the upper window channel, the

automatic reverse window may

not detect the resistance and will

not stop and reverse direction.

Features of your vehicle

304

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the power

window switches on the passenger

doors by pressing the power win-

dow lock button located on the dri-

ver’s door to the LOCK position

(pressed).

•When the power window lock

switch is pressed :

- The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.

- The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger's

power window.

- The rear passenger's control can-

not operate the rear passenger's

power window.

OPS043023

CAUTION

-Opening /closing Window

To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do

not open or close two windows

or more at the same time. This

will also ensure the longevity of

the fuse.

431

Features of your vehicle

Always double check to make sure

all arms, hands, head and other

obstructions are safely out of the way

before closing a window.

WARNING

- Power windows

Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the power window lock switch

(on the driver's door) in the

LOCK (pressed) position.

Features of your vehicle

324

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the hood. The hood should pop

open slightly.

Open the hood after turning off the

engine on a flat surface, shifting the

shift lever to the P (Park) position for

automatic transaxle and to the 1st

(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manu-

al transaxle, and setting the parking

brake.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise

the hood slightly, pull the second-

ary latch (1) inside of the hood

center and lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will completely

rise by itself after it has been

raised about halfway.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:

• All filler caps in the engine com-

partment must be correctly

installed.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push

down to securely lock in place.

HOOD

OPS043024

OPS043025 WARNING

Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are

removed from the hood open-

ing. Closing the hood with an

obstruction present in the hood

opening may result in severe

personal injury.

433

Features of your vehicle

When you check the engine com-

partment, Take caution to avoid con-

tacting your head with the safety

hook which is located inside of the

hood.

WARNING - Fire risk

Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING - Unsecured

engine hood

Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the hood could fly open

while the vehicle is being driv-

en, causing a total loss of visi-

bility, which might result in an

accident.

Features of your vehicle

344

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened

from inside the vehicle by pulling up

the fuel filler lid opener.

If the fuel filler lid does not open

because ice has formed around it,

tap lightly or push on the lid to break

the ice and release the lid. Do not pry

on the lid. If necessary, spray around

the lid with an approved de-icer fluid

(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or

move the vehicle to a warm place

and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

fuel filler lid opener button.

3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

filler cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it “clicks” once. This indicates

that the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it

in lightly making sure that it is

securely closed.

✽✽NOTICE

There may be an intermittent noise

near the refueling hole while the

engine is idling if the fuel cap is not

closed securely. This occurs normal-

ly with the OBD system.

✽✽NOTICE

When refueling fully at an up hill,

the fuel gauge may not point to the F

position.

It is not a malfunction. If you move

your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel

gauge will move to the full position.

FUEL FILLER LID

OPS043027

OPS043026

435

Features of your vehicle

Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an accident.

✽✽NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks once,

otherwise the fuel cap open warning

indicator light will illuminate

WARNING

- Fire/explosion risk

Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facili-

ty. Failure to follow all warnings

will result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death

due to fire or explosion.

WARNING

- Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another

metal part of the vehicle, a safe

distance away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle, or other gas

source.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or

fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,

etc.) capable of producing static

electricity. Static electricity dis-

charge can ignite fuel vapors

resulting in rapid burning. If you

must reenter the vehicle, you

should once again eliminate

potentially dangerous static

electricity discharge by touch-

ing a metal part of the vehicle,

away from the fuel filler neck,

nozzle or other gasoline source.

WARNING - Portable fuel

container

When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure

to place the container on the

ground prior to refueling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling

has begun, contact with the

vehicle should be maintained

until the filling is complete. Use

only approved portable plastic

fuel containers designed to

carry and store gasoline.

Features of your vehicle

364

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the “Fuel requirements”

suggested in chapter 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replace-

ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or

the equivalent specified for your vehi-

cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control sys-

tem.

CAUTION - Exterior paint

Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any

type of fuel spilled on painted

surfaces may damage the paint.

WARNING - Cell phone

fires

Do not use cellular phones

while refueling. Electric current

and/or electronic interference

from cellular phones can poten-

tially ignite fuel vapors causing

a fire.

WARNING - Smoking

DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle while at

a gas station especially during

refueling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

WARNING - Refueling &

Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. Once

refueling is complete, check to

make sure the filler cap and

filler door are securely closed,

before starting the engine.

437

Features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a

sunroof, you can slide or tilt your

sunroof with the sunroof glass con-

trol lever located on the overhead

console (1).

The sunroof can only be opened,

closed, or tilted when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• After a vehicle is washed or in a

rainstorm be sure to wipe off any

water that is on the sunroof before

operating it.

✽✽NOTICE

The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in

the slide position but can be slid

while in a tilt position.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

-Sunroof control

Do not continue to pull or push

the sunroof glass control lever

after the sunroof is fully

opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the motor or system

components could occur.

OPS043028

WARNING -Roof cargo

Do not operate the sun roof

while using the roof rack to

transport cargo.This may cause

the cargo to come loose and

distract the driver.

Features of your vehicle

384

Sunroof open warning

(if equipped)

If the driver removes the ignition key

(smart key: turns off the engine)

when the sunroof is not fully closed,

the warning chime will sound for a

few seconds and a message will

appear on the LCD display or warn-

ing indicator will illuminate.

Close the sunroof securely when

leaving your vehicle.

Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

If you pull the sunroof control lever

backward, both the sunshade and

sunroof glass will slide all the way

open. To stop the sunroof movement

at any point, pull or push the sunroof

glass control lever momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof glass control

lever backward, the sunroof glass will

slide all the way open. To stop the

sunroof glass movement at any point,

pull or push the sunroof control lever

momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass pull (or

push) the sunroof glass control lever

downward (or forward).

• Type A

When you push the sunroof glass

control lever forward or pull it

downward, the sunshade will be

closed halfway and glass will be

closed at the same time. And then

sunshade will be fully closed final-

ly.

• Type B

When you push the sunroof glass

control lever forward or pull it

downward while the sunshade

opened, the glass will be closed.

OPS043120

OPS043029

439

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is

detected while the sunroof is closing

automatically, it will reverse the direc-

tion, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not

work if a tiny obstacle is between the

sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all pas-

sengers and objects are away from

the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sun-

roof, open the sunshade (refer to the

following page for instructions on

how to use the sunshade).

To tilt up the sunroof

- Push the sunroof glass control

lever upward.

❈When you push the sunroof glass

control lever upward while the

sunshade closed, the sunshade

will be opened halfway and then

glass will be tilt up.

To tilt down (or close) the sunroof

- Push the sunroof glass control

lever forward or pull it downward

• Type A

When you push the sunroof glass

control lever forward or pull it

downward while the sunshade

opened, the sunshade will be

closed halfway and then glass will

be tilt down and then sunshade will

be fully closed finally.

• Type B

When you push the sunroof glass

control lever forward or pull it

downward while the sunshade

opened, the glass will be tilt down.

Make sure your hands and head are

safely out of the way before closing a

sunroof.

OPS043030OXM049029

Features of your vehicle

404

Sunshade

To open the sunshade

Press the sunshade open button (1).

To stop the sliding at any point, press

the sunshade control switch momen-

tarily.

WARNING - Panoramic

sunroof

Your panoramic sunroof is

made of glass which can break

if impacted with sufficient force.

If your sunroof breaks while you

are driving your vehicle, remain

calm, safely pull your vehicle

out of traffic and park your vehi-

cle in a safe location where you

can call for assistance.

CAUTION

-Sunroof motor damage

• Periodically remove any dirt

that may accumulate on the

guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is

below freezing or when the

sunroof is covered with snow

or ice, the glass or the motor

could be damaged.

OPS043031

WARNING - Sunroof

Operation

When closing the sunroof, make

sure there are no body parts in

the movement range of the slid-

ing roof. Parts of the body could

become trapped or crushed.

441

Features of your vehicle

To close the sunshade when the

sunroof glass is closed

- Press the sunshade close button (2).

❈When you press the sunshade

close button(2) with the sunroof

glass opened

• Type A

The sunshade will be closed

halfway.

• Type B

The sunshade will be closed

halfway, then sunroof glass will be

closed and then sunshade will be

fully closed finally.

- Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward or pull it down.

To stop the sliding at any point, press

the sunshade control switch momen-

tarily.

✽✽NOTICE

Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as

material characteristic are normal.

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-

connected or discharged, you must

reset your sunroof system as follows:

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2.Close the sunshade and sunroof

completely if opened.

3.Release the sunroof control lever.

4.Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward in the direction of close (about

10 seconds) until the sunroof moves

a little. Then, release the lever.

CAUTION

- Automatic sunroof shade

• Do not pull or push the sun-

shade by hand as such action

may damage the sunshade or

cause it to malfunction.

• Close the sunroof when driv-

ing in dusty environments.

Dust may cause a malfunction

of the vehicle system.

Features of your vehicle

424

5.Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward in the direction of close, until

the sunroof operates as follows

again:

The sunshade and sunroof glass

slide open →The sunroof glass

slide close →The sunshade close

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof

system has been reset.

✽✽NOTICE

If you do not reset the sunroof, it

may not work properly.

443

Features of your vehicle

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to

assist you in steering the vehicle. If

the engine is off or if the power steer-

ing system becomes inoperative, the

vehicle may still be steered, but it will

require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is

controlled by a power steering con-

trol unit which senses the steering

wheel torque and vehicle speed to

command the motor.

The steering becomes heavier as

the vehicle’s speed increases and

becomes lighter as the vehicle’s

speed decreases for optimum steer-

ing control.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the power

steering checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally,

the warning light will illuminate on

the instrument cluster.The steering

wheel may require increased

steering effort. Take your vehicle to

an authorized Kia dealer and have

the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, noise

may occur. If temperature rises, the

noise will likely disappear. This is a

normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary,

when the steering wheel is turned

all the way to the left or right con-

tinuously, the steering wheel

becomes harder to turn. The power

assist is limited to protect the

motor from overheating.

As time passes, the steering wheel

return to its normal condition.

✽✽NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not

illuminate.

• The steering gets heavy immedi-

ately after turning the ignition

switch on. This happens as the sys-

tem performs the EPS system

diagnostics. When the diagnostics

are completed, the steering wheel

will return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from

the EPS relay after the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or

LOCK (OFF) position.

• A motor noise may be heard when

the vehicle is at a stop or at a low

driving speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally,

the warning light will illuminate on

the instrument cluster. The steer-

ing wheel may become difficult to

control or operate abnormally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer and have the vehicle

checked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

STEERING WHEEL

Features of your vehicle

444

(Continued)

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-

mal noise may occur. If tempera-

ture rises, the noise will likely dis-

appear. This is a normal condition.

• When the charging system warn-

ing light comes on due to the low

voltage (When the alternator or

battery) does not operate normal-

ly or it malfunctions), the steering

wheel may require increased

steering effort.

Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt and telescopic steering allows

you to adjust the steering wheel

before you drive.You can also raise it

to give your legs more room when

you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi-

tioned so that it is comfortable for

you to drive, while permitting you to

see the instrument panel warning

lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,

pull down the lock-release lever (1),

adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and height (3, if

equipped) then pull up the lock-

release lever to lock (4) the steering

wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the

steering wheel to the desired posi-

tion before driving.

OPS043032

WARNING -Steering

wheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle and

height of the steering wheel

while driving. You may lose

steering control.

445

Features of your vehicle

Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

With the ignition switch in the ON

position, pressing the heated steer-

ing wheel button warms the steering

wheel. The indicator on the button

will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off,

press the button once again. The

indicator on the button will turn off.

✽✽NOTICE

The heated steering wheel will turn

off automatically approximately 30

minutes after the heated steering

wheel is turned on.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn

symbols on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽✽NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol on

your steering wheel (see illustra-

tion). The horn will operate only

when this area is pressed.

OPS043033

OPS043034

CAUTION

• Do not install any grip to oper-

ate the steering wheel. This

causes damage to the heated

steering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heated

steering wheel, do not use an

organic solvent such as paint

thinner, benzene, alcohol and

gasoline. Doing so may dam-

age the surface of the steering

wheel.

• If the surface of steering

wheel is damaged by sharp

object, damage to the heated

steering wheel components

could occur.

Features of your vehicle

464

FLEX STEER

The FLEX STEER controls steering

effort based upon as driver's prefer-

ence or road condition.

You can select the desired steering

mode by pressing the FLEX STEER

button.

When the steering mode button is

pressed, the selected steering mode

will appear on the instrument cluster.

If the steering mode button is pressed

within 4 seconds, the steering mode

will change as shown above.

If the steering wheel mode button is

not pressed for about 4 seconds, the

LCD display will change to the previ-

ous screen (for Type B cluster).

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely

to operate it, or hit it with your

fist. Do not press on the horn

with a sharp-pointed object.

OPS043036

OPS043209

447

Features of your vehicle

Normal mode

The normal mode offers medium

steering effort.

Sport mode

The steering wheel becomes heav-

ier. The sport mode is usually used

when driving on the highway.

Comfort mode

The steering wheel becomes lighter.

The comfort mode is usually used

when driving in the city or when park-

ing the vehicle.

OPS043129 OPS043130 OPS043131

Features of your vehicle

484

• For your safety, if you press the

steering mode button while operat-

ing the steering wheel, but the

steering effort will not change

immediately. After operating the

steering wheel, the steering effort

will change automatically to the

selected mode.

• Use caution when changing the

steering mode while driving.

• When the electronic power steer-

ing is not operating properly, the

flex steering wheel will not work.

449

Features of your vehicle

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the

center view through the rear window

is seen. Make this adjustment before

you start driving.

Do not place objects in the rear seat

or cargo area which would interfere

with your vision through the rear win-

dow.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you

start driving and while the day/night

lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce the glare from the headlights

of the vehicles behind you during

night driving.

Remember that you lose some

rearview clarity in the night position.

WARNING

- Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust the rearview mir-

ror while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of con-

trol.

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror

and don’t install a wide mirror. It

could result in injury, during an

accident or deployment of the

air bag. OAM049023

Day

Night

Features of your vehicle

504

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automat-

ically controls the glare from the

headlights of the vehicles behind you

in nighttime or low light driving condi-

tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-

ror senses the light level around the

vehicle, and automatically controls

the headlight glare from the vehicles

behind you.

When the engine is running, the

glare is automatically controlled by

the sensor mounted in the rearview

mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted

into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-

matically go to the brightest setting in

order to improve the drivers view

behind the vehicle.

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion whenever the ignition switch is

turned on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to

turn the automatic dimming func-

tion off. The mirror indicator light

will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to

turn the automatic dimming func-

tion on. The mirror indicator light

will illuminate.

CAUTION - Cleaning

mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner.

Do not spray glass cleaner

directly on the mirror. It may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

OAM042349L

Indicator Sensor

451

Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles

before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand outside

rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be

adjusted remotely with the remote

switch. The mirror heads can be fold-

ed back to prevent damage during an

automatic vehicle wash or when

passing through a narrow street.

The right outside rearview mirror is

convex. Objects seen in the mirror

are closer than they appear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or

direct observation to determine the

actual distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use an

approved spray de-icer (not radiator

antifreeze) to release the frozen

mechanism or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

CAUTION

- Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the sur-

face of the glass. If ice should

restrict the movement of the mir-

ror, do not force the mirror for

adjustment.To remove ice, use a

deicer spray, or a sponge or soft

cloth with very warm water.

WARNING

- Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while the vehi-

cle is moving. This could result

in loss of control.

Features of your vehicle

524

Remote control

Electric type

The electric remote control mirror

switch allows you to adjust the position

of the left and right outside rearview

mirrors.To adjust the position of either

mirror the ignition switch should be in

the ACC position. Move the switch (1)

to R or L to select the right side mirror

or the left side mirror, then press a cor-

responding point on the mirror adjust-

ment control to position the selected

mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the switch

into the neutral (center) position to

prevent inadvertent adjustment.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

grasp the housing of the mirror and

then fold it toward the rear of the

vehicle.

OPS043035

CAUTION - Outside mirror

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum

adjusting angles, but the

motor continues to operate

while the switch is pressed.

Do not press the switch longer

than necessary, the motor

may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the

outside rearview mirror by

hand. Doing so may damage

the parts.

OPS043037

453

Features of your vehicle

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can be

folded or unfolded by pressing the

switch as below.

Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.

Right (2) : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :

The mirror will fold or unfold auto-

matically as follows:

• Without smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the transmitter.

• With smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the button on the outside door

handle.

- The mirror will unfold when you

approach the vehicle (all doors

closed and locked) with a smart

key in possession. (if equipped)

CAUTION - Electric type

outside

rearview mirror

The electric type outside

rearview mirror operates even

though the ignition switch is in

the OFF position. However, to

prevent unnecessary battery

discharge, do not adjust the

mirrors longer than necessary

while the engine is not running.

In case it is an electric type out-

side rearview mirror, don’t fold it

by hand. It could cause motor

failure.

OPS043038

Features of your vehicle

544

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. LCD display

6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)

7. Turn signal indicator lights

OPS043100C/OPS043101C

■■Type A

❈The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in

this chapter.

■■Type B

455

Features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster

Illumination

The brightness of the instrument

panel illumination is changed by

pressing the illumination control button

("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the

tale lights are turned on. • If you hold the illumination control

button ("+" or "-"), the brightness

will be changed continuously.

• If the brightness reaches to the

maximum or minimum level, an

alarm will sound.

LCD Display Control

The LCD display modes can be

changed by using the control buttons

on the steering wheel.

OPS043039

OPS043117

OTF044112L

■Type A

■ Type B OPS043202

OPS043040

■Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

564

[For type A cluster]

(1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing

trip modes

(2) RESET : RESET button for

resetting items

[For type B cluster]

(1) : MODE button for changing

modes or SELECT button

for setting the selected item

(2) : MOVE button for changing

items or RESET button for

resetting the selected item

❈For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the

speed of the vehicle and is calibrated

in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-

meters per hour (km/h).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the

approximate number of engine revo-

lutions per minute (rpm).

OPS043102N

OPS043103C

■Type A

■ Type B

OPS043104N

OPS043106

■Type A

■ Type B

457

Features of your vehicle

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop

button is ON.

If the gauge pointer moves beyond

the normal range area toward the “H”

position, it indicates overheating that

may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an over-

heated engine. If your vehicle over-

heats, refer to “If the Engine

Overheats” in chapter 6.

CAUTION - Red zone

Do not operate the engine with-

in the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine

damage.

OPS043108

OPS043109

■Type A

■ Type B

WARNING - Hot radiato

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The

engine coolant is under pressure

and could severely burn. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

Features of your vehicle

584

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the

fuel tank.

✽✽NOTICE

• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, which

will illuminate when the fuel tank

is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel

gauge pointer may fluctuate or the

low fuel warning light may come

on earlier than usual due to the

movement of fuel in the tank.

✽✽NOTICE

Fuel display may not be accurate if

you are filling in sloping places.

OPS043110

OPS043111

■Type A

■ Type B

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Stop and obtain additional fuel

as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when

the gauge indicator comes

close to the E level. Running out

of fuel can expose vehicle occu-

pants to danger.

CAUTION - Low fuel

Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of

fuel could cause the engine to

misfire damaging the catalytic

converter.

459

Features of your vehicle

Odometer

The odometer Indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles

or kilometers.

Outside Temperature Gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-

side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).

- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C-

(40°F ~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not change immediately

like a general thermometer to pre-

vent the driver from being inattentive.

To change the temperature unit (from

°C to °F or from °F to °C)

• Type A Cluster

Change the trip modes to Distance

To Empty mode and then press and

hold the RESET button for 5 seconds

and more.

• Type B Cluster

The temperature unit can be

changed by using the "User

Settings" mode of the LCD display

❈For more details, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

OPS043113C

OPS043118C

■Type A

■ Type B

OPS043114C

OPS043119C

■Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

604

Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

This indicator displays which auto-

matic transaxle shift lever is selected.

•Park :P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

•Drive :D

• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator informs which gear is

desired while driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6

• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

OPS043115

OTF044125L

■Type A

■ Type B

OPS043116

OTF044402

■Type A

■ Type B

461

Features of your vehicle

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently

the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st

gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to

the 3rd gear is desired (current-

ly the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,

or 6th gear).

When the system is not working prop-

erly, the indicator is not displayed.

Features of your vehicle

624

LCD Modes (for type B cluster)

LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Tur n By Turn

(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the navigation.

A/V

(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Service This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages

related to TPMS and so on.

Master warning

User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.

❈For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

463

Features of your vehicle

Service Mode

Service Interval

Service in

It calculates and displays when you

need a scheduled maintenance

service (mileage or days).

If the remaining mileage or time

reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30

days, "Service in" message is dis-

played for several seconds each time

you set the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serv-

iced according to the already inputted

service interval, “Service required”

message is displayed for several sec-

onds each time you set the ignition

switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to

the ON position (The mileage and

time changes to "---").

To reset the service interval to the

mileage and days you inputted before:

- Press the RESET button for

more than 1 second.

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,

“Service in OFF” message is dis-

played on the LCD display.

✽✽NOTICE

If any of the following conditions

occurs, the mileage and days may be

incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

OPS043134C

OTF044196L OTF044192L

Features of your vehicle

644

Master Warning Mode

(if equipped)

• This warning light informs the driv-

er the following situations

- Service reminder (if equipped)

The Master Warning Light illumi-

nates when more than one of the

above warning situations occur. At

this time, the LCD Modes Icon will

change from ( ) to ( ).

If the warning situation is solved, the

LCD Modes Icon will be changed back

to its previous icon ( ).

User Settings Mode

Description

On this mode, you can change set-

ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.

Door

Auto Door Lock (if equipped)

• Off:

The auto door lock operation will

be deactivated.

• Speed (for manual transaxle)

All doors will be automatically

locked when the vehicle speed

exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

• Shift Lever:

All doors will be automatically

locked if the automatic transaxle

shift lever is shifted from the P

(Park) position to the R (Reverse),

N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

OPS043132

465

Features of your vehicle

Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)

• Off:

The auto door unlock operation will

be canceled.

• Key Out or Power Off:

All doors will be automatically

unlocked when the ignition key is

removed from ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button is set to

the OFF position.

• Shift Lever:

All doors will be automatically

unlocked if the automatic transaxle

shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)

position.

Two Press Unlock (if equipped)

• Off:

The two press unlock function will

be deactivated.Therefore, all doors

will unlock if the door is unlocked.

• On:

The driver’s door will unlock if the

door is unlocked. When the door is

unlocked again within 4 seconds,

all doors will unlock.

Horn Feedback (if equipped)

• Off:

The Horn feedback operation will

be deactivated.

• On:

After locking the door by pressing

the lock button on the transmitter, if

you press the lock button again

within 4 seconds, the warning

sound will operate once to indicate

that all doors are locked.

Lamp

One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the lane

change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7

times when the turn signal lever is

moved slightly.

Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the headlamp

delay function will be activated.

Settings

Language

Choose the language you prefer

within the LCD.

Temperature Unit

Convert the temperature unit from °C

to °F or from °F to °C.

Welcome Sound

If this item is checked, the welcome

sound function will be activated.

AVG Fuel Eco Reset

• Auto Reset:

The average fuel economy will

reset automatically when refueling.

• Manual Reset:

The average fuel economy will not

reset automatically whenever refu-

eling.

For more details, refer to “Trip

Computer” in this chapter.

Features of your vehicle

664

Service Interval

On this mode, you can activate the

service interval function with mileage

(mi. or km) and period (months).

A/V Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

A/V system.

Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

OTF044129OPS043133C OPS043208C

467

Features of your vehicle

Warning Messages

Shift to "P" position (for smart key

system and automatic transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates if

you try to turn off the engine without

the shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop

Button turns to the ACC position (If

you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button once more, it will turn to the

ON position).

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates

if the battery of the smart key is

discharged when the Engine

Start/Stop Button changes to the

OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start engine

(for smart key system and auto-

matic transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates

if the Engine Start/Stop Button

changes to the ACC position twice

by pressing the button repeatedly

without depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depress

the brake pedal to start the engine.

OTF044148L

OTF044142L

OTF044152L

Features of your vehicle

684

Press clutch pedal to start engine

(for smart key system and manual

transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates if

the Engine Start/Stop Button

changes to the ACC position twice

by pressing the button repeatedly

without depressing the clutch pedal.

• It means that you should depress

the clutch pedal to start the engine.

Key not in vehicle

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates

if the smart key is not in the vehicle

while the door is opened or closed

with the ignition switch in the ACC

position or engine is running.

• It means that you should always

have the smart key with you.

Key not detected

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates

if the smart key is not detected

when you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button.

OTF044190L

OTF044138L OTF044140L

469

Features of your vehicle

Press start button again

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates

if you can not operate the Engine

Start/Stop Button when there is a

problem with the Engine Start/Stop

Button system.

• It means that you could start the

engine by pressing the Engine

Start/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates each

time you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Press start button with smart key

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates

if you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button while the warning message

“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indica-

tor light blinks.

Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"

(for smart key system and auto-

matic transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates

if the brake switch fuse is discon-

nected.

• It means that you should replace

the fuse with a new one. If that is

not possible, you can start the

engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in

the ACC position.

OTF044146LOTF044144L

OTF044157L

Features of your vehicle

704

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine

(for smart key system and auto-

matic transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates

if you try to start the engine with

the shift lever not in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position.

✽✽NOTICE

You can start the engine with the

shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

But, for your safety, we recommend

that you start the engine with the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Door Open

• It means that any door is open.

Tailgate Open

• It means that the tailgate is open.

OTF044150L

OPS043121 OPS043122

471

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

• The warning message illuminates

if you turn off the engine when the

sunroof is open.

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

(if equipped)

• This warning message illuminates

if the fuse switch on the fuse box is

OFF.

• The "FUSE" and "on" warning

messages are displayed alternate-

ly. (for Type A)

• It means that you should turn the

fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in

chapter 7.

OPS043120

OPS044309L

OPS043405L

■Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

724

Tripmeter A

Tripmeter B

Range

Average Fuel Economy*

Average Vehicle Speed*

Elapsed Time*

* if equipped

To change the trip mode, press the

TRIP button.

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminates

on the service reminder mode if

the washer fluid level in the reser-

voir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill the

washer fluid.

Overview

Description

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

✽✽NOTICE

Some driving information stored in

the trip computer (for example

Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the

battery is disconnected.

Trip Modes (for Type A cluster)

TRIP COMPUTER

OTF044159L

473

Features of your vehicle

Trip Modes (for Type B cluster)

Trip A/B

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-

tance since the last tripmeter reset.

- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.

or km

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

RESET/ button on the steering

wheel for more than 1 second

when the tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and driving time since the

last average vehicle speed reset.

- Speed range: 160 MPH or 200

km/h

• To reset the average vehicle speed,

press the RESET/ button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average vehicle

speed is displayed.

• Tripmeter [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

TRIP B

• Range

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

FUEL ECONOMY

To change the trip mode, press the

MOVE button .

■Type A

OPS043125C

OPS043127C

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

744

✽✽NOTICE

• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less

than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the

driving time is less than 10 seconds

since the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,

the average vehicle speed keeps

going while the engine is running.

Elapsed Time (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driv-

ing time since the last elapsed time

reset.

- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

• To reset the elapsed time, press

the RESET/ button on the steer-

ing wheel for more than 1 second

when the elapsed time is dis-

played.

✽✽NOTICE

Even if the vehicle is not in motion,

the elapsed time keeps going while

the engine is running.

Fuel Economy

Range (1)

• The range to empty is the estimat-

ed distance the vehicle can be

driven with the remaining fuel.

- Distance range : 30 ~ 1999 mi or

50 ~ 1999 km.

• If the estimated distance is below

50 km (30 mi.), the trip computer

will display “---” as distance to

empty.

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been

interrupted, the distance to empty

function may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ

from the actual driving distance as

it is an estimate of the available

driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-

lons (6 liters ) of fuel are added to

the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to

empty may vary significantly based

on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

■Type A

OPS043123C

OPS043128C

■ Type B

475

Features of your vehicle

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the last

average fuel economy reset.

- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the RESET/ but-

ton on the steering wheel for more

than 1 second when the average fuel

economy is displayed.

Automatic reset

To make the average fuel economy

be reset automatically whenever refu-

eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in

User Setting menu of the LCD display

(Refer to “LCD Display”).

Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-

age fuel economy will be cleared to

zero (---) when the vehicle speed

exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more

than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

✽✽NOTICE

The average fuel economy is not dis-

played for more accurate calculation

if the vehicle does not drive more

than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50

meters) since the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is turned

to ON.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fuel

economy during the last few sec-

onds when the vehicle speed is

more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).

- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km

Features of your vehicle

764

Warning lights

✽✽NOTICE - Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights

are OFF after starting the engine. If

any light is still ON, this indicates a

situation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver

that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 3.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

477

Features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level in

reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir

is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required (For more details,

refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake components

for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the

brake system is still found, the

warning light remains on, or the

brakes do not operate properly, do

not drive the vehicle.

In this case, have your vehicle

towed to an authorized Kia dealer

and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-

diagonal braking systems. This

means you still have braking on two

wheels even if one of the dual sys-

tems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure are

required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driv-

ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-

al engine braking and stop the vehi-

cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Features of your vehicle

784

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Electronic

Brake force

Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at

the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

WARNING - Parking Brake

& Brake Fluid Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with

the parking brake released, it

indicates that the brake fluid

level is low.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

WARNING - Electronic

Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system

will not work normally and you

may experience an unexpected

and dangerous situation during

sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed

driving and abrupt braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by

an authorized Kia dealer as

soon as possible.

479

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE - Electronic Brake

force Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on

or both ABS and Parking Brake &

Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,

the speedometer, odometer, or trip-

meter may not work. Also, the EPS

Warning Light may illuminate and

the steering effort may increase or

decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized Kia dealer as

soon as possible.

Electronic Power

Steering (EPS) Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

CAUTION - Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control systems which could

effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

Features of your vehicle

804

Charging System

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

either the alternator or electrical

charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either

the alternator or electrical charging

system:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

alternator drive belt for looseness

or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly,

there may be a problem in the

electrical charging system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Gasoline

Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-

tial catalytic converter damage

is possible which could result in

loss of engine power.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer as soon as possible.

481

Features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more details,

refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If

the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on

after adding oil or if oil is not avail-

able, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Kia dealer as

soon as possible.

Low Fuel Level Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light

• If the engine does not stop

immediately after the Engine

Oil Pressure Warning Light is

illuminated, severe damage

could result.

• If the warning light stays on

while the engine is running, it

indicates that there may be

serious engine damage or

malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as

it is safe to do so.

2.Turn off the engine and

check the oil level. If the oil

level is low, fill the engine

oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the

warning light stays on after

the engine is started, turn

the engine off immediately.

In this case, have your vehi-

cle inspected by an author-

ized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Low Fuel

Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below “0 or E” can cause

the engine to misfire and dam-

age the catalytic converter

(if equipped).

Features of your vehicle

824

Door Ajar Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When a door is not closed securely.

Tailgate Open Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the tailgate is not closed

securely.

Washer Fluid Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When the washer fluid level in the

reservoir is nearly empty.

In this case, you should refill the

washer fluid.

Sunroof Open Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

When the sunroof is not closed

securely.

483

Features of your vehicle

Fuel cap open warning

indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When the fuel filler cap is not tight-

en securely.

Always make sure that the fuel

filler cap is tight.

Indicator Lights

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Features of your vehicle

844

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

ECOMINDER®indicator

Active ECO system

This indicator light illuminates:

When the Active ECO button is

pressed the ECOMINDER®indicator

(green) will illuminate to show that

the Active ECO is operating.

For more detailed information, refer

to "Active ECO" in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (Without Smart Key)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the vehicle detects the

immobilizer in your key properly

while the ignition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

ECO

485

Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)

This indicator light illuminates for up

to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the

smart key in the vehicle properly

while the Engine Start/Stop Button

is ACC or ON.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the

vehicle.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2

seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detect

the smart key which is in the vehi-

cle while the Engine Start/Stop

Button is ON.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery of the smart key

is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start

the engine if you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button with the smart

key. (For more details, refer to

“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

• When you turn the turn signal light

on.

If any of the following occurs, there

may be a malfunction with the turn

signal system. In this case, have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink

but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more

rapidly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-

nate at all.

Features of your vehicle

864

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on and in

the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the tail lights or headlights

are on.

Front Fog Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

CRUISE

487

Features of your vehicle

Cruise SET Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

FLEX STEER indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you press the FLEX STEER

mode button.

For more details, refer to "FLEX

STEER" in chapter 4.

SET

COMPORT

NORMAL

SPORT

Features of your vehicle

884

The rear camera display will activate

when the back-up light is ON with the

ignition switch ON and the shift lever

in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that helps the driver by display-

ing objects behind the vehicle when

backing up.

Always keep the camera lens clean.

If lens is covered with foreign matter,

the camera may not operate normal-

ly.

The rear camera display is not a

safety device. It only serves to assist

the driver in identifying objects

directly behind the middle of the

vehicle. The camera does NOT cover

the complete area behind the vehi-

cle. While the camera's display is

generally accurate, objects can be

much closer than they appear in the

display screen and can be distorted

in both size and proportion.

REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

OPS043050

OPS043051

WARNING - Backing up

using camera

Never rely solely on the rear

camera display when backing.

You must always use methods

of viewing the area behind you

including looking over both

shoulders as well as continu-

ously checking all three rear

view mirrors. Due to the difficul-

ty of ensuring that the area

behind you remains clear,

always back slowly and stop

immediately if you even suspect

that a person, and especially a

child, might be behind you.

489

Features of your vehicle

Headlamp escort (if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the

ACC or OFF position with the head-

lights ON, the headlights remain on

for about 5 minutes. However, if the

driver’s door is opened and closed,

the headlights are turned off after 15

seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the lock button on the trans-

mitter (or smart key) twice or turning

the light switch to the OFF or Auto

position. However, if you turn the light

switch to the Auto position when it is

dark outside, the headlights will not

be turned off immediately.

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when

the driver removes the ignition key

and opens the driver-side door (in

that order).

• With this feature, the parking lights

will turn off automatically if the driv-

er parks on the side of the road at

night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed,

perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch

on the steering column.

Daytime running light

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may

help make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day. DRL can be helpful in many dif-

ferent driving conditions, and it is

especially helpful after dawn and

before sunset.

The DRL system turns OFF when:

1. The front fog light or headlight (low

beam) switch is ON.

2. The engine is OFF.

3. The parking brake is applied.

LIGHTING

Features of your vehicle

904

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and

a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the park-

ing light position (1st position), the

tail, license and instrument panel

lights will turn ON.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-

light position (2nd position), the

head, tail, license and instrument

panel lights will turn ON.

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

OAM049041 OAM049042OXM049110

491

Features of your vehicle

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO

light position, the taillights and head-

lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-

matically depending on the amount

of light outside the vehicle.

• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument

panel. This will ensure better auto-

light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a win-

dow cleaner. The cleaner may

leave a light film which could inter-

fere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or

other types of metallic coating on

the front windshield, the Auto light

system may not work properly.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it

back for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlight high beams are

switched on.

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the lights

on for a prolonged time while the

engine is not running.

OMD040095 OAM049044

Features of your vehicle

924

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the nor-

mal (low beam) position when

released. The headlight switch does

not need to be on to use this flashing

feature.

Turn signals and lane change

signals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on

the turn signals, move the lever up or

down (A).The green arrow indicators

on the instrument panel indicate

which turn signal is operating. They

will self-cancel after a turn is com-

pleted. If the indicator continues to

flash after a turn, manually return the

lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the

turn signal lever slightly and hold it in

position (B). The lever will return to

the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of

the turn signal bulbs may be burned

out and will require replacement.

If an indicator flash is abnormally

quick or slow, a bulb may be burned

out or have a poor electrical connec-

tion in the circuit.

OAM049045

OAM049043

WARNING - High beams

Do not use high beam when

there are other vehicles. Using

high beam could obstruct the

other driver's vision.

493

Features of your vehicle

One-touch lane change function

To activate an one-touch lane

change function, move the turn sig-

nal lever slightly and then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3,

5 or 7 times.

You can choose one-touch lane

change blinking function in "One

touch turn lamp" of "User setting".

Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.

✽✽NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally

quick or slow, the bulb may be

burned out or have a poor electrical

connection in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide

improved visibility when visibility is

poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The

fog lights will turn on when the fog light

switch (1) is turned to the on position

after the headlight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog

light switch (1) to the OFF position.

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

OAM049046N

Features of your vehicle

944

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjust-

ment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· ON – Continuous wipe

· INT – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped)

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the igni-

tion switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push

the lever upward and release

it with the lever in the OFF

position. The wipers will oper-

ate continuously if the lever is

pushed upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Use

this mode in light rain or mist.

To vary the speed setting, turn

the speed control knob (1).

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

(if equipped)

OAM049100N/OAM049048N

OAM049101N

495

Features of your vehicle

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

If there is heavy accumulation of

snow or ice on the windshield, defrost

the windshield for about 10 minutes,

or until the snow and/or ice is

removed before using the windshield

wipers to ensure proper operation.

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windshield and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the wind-

shield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will

continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check

the washer fluid level. If the fluid level

is not sufficient, you will need to add

appropriate non-abrasive windshield

washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in

the front of the engine compartment

on the passenger side.

OAM049102N

CAUTION - Washer pump

To prevent possible damage to

the washer pump, do not oper-

ate the washer when the fluid

reservoir is empty.

WARNING - Obscured

visibility

Do not use the washer in freez-

ing temperatures without first

warming the windshield with

the defrosters; the washer solu-

tion could freeze on the wind-

shield and obscure your vision.

Features of your vehicle

964

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (if equipped)

The rear window wiper switch is

located at the end of the wiper and

washer switch lever. Turn the switch

to the desired position to operate the

rear wiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation

(if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to

spray rear washer fluid and to run the

rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray

and wiper operation will continue

until you release the lever.

OAM049103N

CAUTION

- Wipers& windshields

• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windshield,

do not operate the wipers

when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the

wiper blades, do not use gaso-

line, kerosene, paint thinner,

or other solvents on or near

them.

• To prevent damage to the

wiper arms and other compo-

nents, do not attempt to move

the wipers manually.

OXM049125

497

Features of your vehicle

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine is

not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

• When all entrances are closed, if

you lock the vehicle by using the

transmitter or the smart key, all

interior lamp will be off after a few

seconds.

• If you do not operate anything in

the vehicle after turning off the

engine, the lights will turn off after

20 minutes.

Map lamp

Press the lens (1) or button (1) to

turn the map lamp on or off

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING - Interior light

Do not use the interior lights

when driving in the dark. The

glare from the interior lights

may obstruct your view and

cause an accident. OPS043052

OPS043053

■Type B

■Type A

Features of your vehicle

984

• ROOM (2) :

- The map lamp and room lamp

stays on at all times.

- To turn off the ROOM mode,

press the ROOM button (2) once

again (not pressed.)

• DOOR (3) :

- The map lamp and room lamp

comes on when a door is opened.

The lamps go out after approxi-

mately 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lamp

comes on for approximately 30

seconds when doors are unlocked

with a transmitter or smart key as

long as the doors are not opened.

- The map lamp and room lamp will

stay on for approximately 20 min-

utes if a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC or

LOCK/OFF position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will

stay on continuously if the door is

opened with the ignition switch in

the ON position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will

go out immediately if the ignition

switch is changed to the ON posi-

tion or all doors are locked.

- To turn off the DOOR mode,

press the DOOR button (3) once

again (not pressed).

✽✽NOTICE

• When the lamp is turned on by

pressing the lens (1), the lamp does

not turn off even if the DOOR

mode or ROOM mode is not

selected (not pressed).

• If the ROOM button and DOOR

button are pressed at the same

time, the map lamp and room

lamp will stay on at all times

(ROOM mode will be selected).

Room lamp

Press the button to turn the light on

or off.

If the front map lamp turns on by the

front map lamp switch, the room

lamp will turn on.

OPS043054

OPS043072

■Type B

■Type A

499

Features of your vehicle

Luggage room lamp

The luggage room lamp comes on

when the tailgate is opened.

The lamp comes on as long as the

tailgate is open. To prevent unneces-

sary charging system drain, close

the tailgate securely after using the

luggage room.

Portable lamp usage

(if equipped)

1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after

separation can be used as a

portable.

2. Press push button (1).

3. Pull out the lamp holder.

4. Press the power switch (2).

❈If the portable lamp does not turn

on, it means the portable lamp

needs to be charged. Insert the

lamp holder and then charge it

again. The charge mode will be

activated if the ignition switch (or

engine start/stop button) is on

position or engine is running.

OPS043055

OPS043056

■Type B

■Type A

OPS043197

Features of your vehicle

1004

If the portable lamp does not turn on

anymore after charged, replace the

rechargeable batteries.

Battery replacement

When replacement is necessary, use

the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently try open the battery cover.

2. Replace the batteries with new

rechargeable batteries (AAA size).

When replacing the batteries,

make sure the position of batteries.

3. Close the cover carefully.

CAUTION - Portable lamp

damage

1. Remove the batteries when

not in use for a long time.

2. Use the specified battery.

3.You can use the regular bat-

teries (Disposable batteries)

but do not use the Non-

rechargeable battery in

charge mode. It may damage

the vehicle.

4. Do not place the lamp with

water or moist places and liq-

uid compounds. These can

cause internal leakage of a

battery.

5. When replacing the batteries,

check the direction and insert.

It will not be charged if

installed reversely.

6. Do not mix the rechargeable

batteries.

It may not be charged normally.

OTAM041101

4101

Features of your vehicle

Glove box lamp (if equipped)

The glove box lamp comes on when

the glove box is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, close the glove box

securely after using the glove box.

Vanity mirror lamp

(if equipped)

Pull the sunvisor downward and you

can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or

OFF by pushing the button.

• : To turn the lamp ON.

• O : To turn the lamp OFF.

To prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, turn off the lamp by

pushing the O button after using the

lamp.

OPS043057

OAM042336

Features of your vehicle

1024

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to “Windshield

defrosting and defogging” in this sec-

tion.

Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from

the rear window, while the engine is

running.

To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window

defroster button located in the center

facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it off

before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automati-

cally turns off after approximately 20

minutes or when the ignition switch is

turned off. To turn off the defroster,

press the rear window defroster but-

ton again.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION - Conductors

To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the inside

surface of the rear window,

never use sharp instruments or

window cleaners containing

abrasives to clean the window.

OPS043150

OPS043153

OPS043152

■ Type A

■ Type C

■ Type B

4103

Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the

outside rearview mirror defrosters,

they will operate at the same time you

turn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

The front wiper deicer will operate at

the same time you turn on the front

windshield defroster.

• To turn off the wiper deicer, press

the front windshield defroster but-

ton again.

• The front wiper deicer automatical-

ly turns off after approximately 20

minutes or when the ignition switch

is turned off.

Features of your vehicle

1044

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

OPS043154

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Air intake control button

3. Mode selection knob

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Temperature control knob

6. Air conditioning button

(if equipped)

4105

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

OPS043058

Features of your vehicle

1064

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Five

symbols are used to represent.

Vent mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield and

side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost mode

(A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters.

Defrost mode (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window

defrosters.

OPS043155

4107

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed separately using the thumb-

wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivery from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows

you to control the temperature of the

air flow from the ventilation system.

To change the air temperature in the

passenger compartment, turn the

knob to the right position for warm air

or left position for cooler air.

To operate the MAX A/C, turn the

temperature knob to extreme left. Air

flow is directed toward the upper

body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and

the recirculated air position will be

selected automatically.

OPS043059

OPS043156

OPS043159

Features of your vehicle

1084

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to

select the outside (fresh) air position

or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control posi-

tion, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger com-

partment will be drawn

through the heating sys-

tem and heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (without

air conditioning selected) may cause

fogging of the windshield and side

windows and the air within the pas-

senger compartment may become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

OPS043160

WARNING - Recirculated

air

Continuous use of the climate

control system in the recirculat-

ed air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

WARNING

- Reduced visibilty

Continued use of the climate

control system in the recirculat-

ed air position may allow

humidity to increase inside the

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

4109

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

When the heater or air conditioning

system is on with the sunroof

opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-

tion will be automatically selected. At

this time, if you press the recirculated

air position button, the recirculated

air position will be selected but will

change back to the outside (fresh) air

position after 3 minutes.

When the sunroof is closed, the air

intake position will return to the orig-

inal position that was selected.

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flow

from the ventilation system. To

change the fan speed, turn the knob

to the right for higher speed, or left

for lower speed. To turn the fan

speed control off, turn the knob to

the “0” position.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan

speed control knob to the "0" posi-

tion.

OPS043157 OPS043158

Features of your vehicle

1104

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator

light will illuminate). Press the button

again to turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the

mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the vehicle through

the ventilation system, temporarily

set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. Be sure to

return the control to the fresh air

position when the irritation has

passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driv-

er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system

is drawn in through the grilles just

ahead of the windshield. Care

should be taken that these are not

blocked by leaves, snow, ice or

other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to

the fresh air position and fan speed

to the desired position, turn on the

air conditioning system, and adjust

the temperature control to desired

temperature.

OPS043161

4111

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air con-

ditioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi-

tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

extreme left position, set the mode

control to the MAX A/C position,

then set the fan speed control to

the highest speed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system

operation, you may occasionally

notice a slight change in engine

speed as the air conditioning com-

pressor cycles. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

CAUTION - Excessive A/C

When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine

coolant closely while driving up

hills or in heavy traffic when out-

side temperatures are high. Air

conditioning system operation

may cause engine overheating

and potential engine damage.

Continue to use the blower fan

but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the engine coolant

temperature gauge indicates

engine overheating.

Features of your vehicle

1124

• When using the air conditioning

system, you may notice clear water

dripping (or even puddling) on the

ground under the passenger side

of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-

tem operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-

tem in the recirculated air position

provides maximum cooling, how-

ever, continual operation in this

mode may cause the air inside the

vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and

humid air intake. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the

vehicle from the outside through the

heating and air conditioning system. If

dust or other pollutants accumulate in

the filter over a period of time, the air

flow from the air vents may decrease,

resulting in moisture accumulation on

the inside of the windshield even

when the outside (fresh) air position is

selected. If this happens, have the cli-

mate control air filter replaced by an

authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 15,000

miles or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty or

rough roads, more frequent air

conditioner filter inspections and

changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized Kia

dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

4113

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative impact on the air con-

ditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used, otherwise

damage to the vehicle and

injury may occur. To prevent

damage, the air conditioning

system in your vehicle should

only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians.

WARNING

The oil and refrigerant in your

vehicle's air conditioning sys-

tem is under very high pres-

sure. If proper service proce-

dures are not followed an explo-

sion may result. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death,

the air conditioning system in

your vehicle should only be

serviced by trained and certi-

fied technicians.

Features of your vehicle

1144

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OPS043162/OPS043163

1. Temperature control button / knob

2. Front windshield defroster button

3. Rear windshield defroster button

4. Climate control display

5. Air intake control button

6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

7. Fan speed control button

8. AUTO (automatic control) button

9. OFF button

10. Mode selection button

11. Climate control information screen

selection button

■ Type A

■ Type B

4115

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air con-

ditioning

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indi-

cated by AUTO on the display. The

modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically by temperature set-

ting.

2. Push the temperature control but-

ton to set the desired temperature.

(Type A)

Turn the temperature control knob

to set the desired temperature.

(Type B)

✽✽NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation

off, select any button or switch of

the following:

- Mode selection button

- Air conditioning button

- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time

to deselect the front windshield

defroster function. The ‘AUTO’

sign will illuminate on the infor-

mation display once again.)

- Air intake control button

- Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other func-

tions operate automatically.

• Regardless of the temperature set-

ting, when using automatic opera-

tion, the air conditioning system

can automatically turn on to

decrease the humidity inside the

vehicle, even if the temperature is

set to warm.

OPS043164

OPS043165

■Type B

■Type A

OPS043170

OPS043171

■Type B

■Type A

Features of your vehicle

1164

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating

and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi-

tioning

The heating and cooling system can

be controlled manually by pushing

buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning

any knob) except AUTO button while

automatic operation, the functions

not selected will be controlled auto-

matically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to

convert to full automatic control of

the system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

Refer to the illustration in the

“Manual climate control system”.

OPS043071 OPS043166

OPS043167

■Type B

■Type A

4117

Features of your vehicle

The air flow outlet port is converted

as follows: Vent mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each out-

let can be controlled to direct the air

discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is discharged towards the

face and floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield and

side window defroster.

Floor/Defrost mode

(A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters.

Features of your vehicle

1184

Defrost mode (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or

closed separately using the thumb-

wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivered from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

• Type A

The temperature will increase to the

maximum (HI) by pushing the button

().

OPS043168

OPS043169

■Type B

■Type A

OPS043059 OPS043170

OPS043171

■Type B

■Type A

4119

Features of your vehicle

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum (Lo) by pushing the button

().

When pushing the button, the tem-

perature will increase or decrease by

0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest

temperature setting, the air condi-

tioning will operate continuously.

• Type B

The temperature will increase to the

maximum (HI) by turning the knob to

the right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to

the left extremely.

When turning the knob, the tempera-

ture will increase or decrease by

0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest

temperature setting, the air condi-

tioning will operate continuously.

Temperature scale conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode

display will reset to Centigrade.

This is normal condition. You can

switch the temperature scale as fol-

lows;

While pressing the AUTO button,

press the OFF button for 3 seconds

or more. The temperature scale will

change from Centigrade to

Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to

Centigrade.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F

or from °F to °C) can be changed by

using the “User Settings” mode of the

LCD display.

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air posi-

tion.

To change the air intake control posi-

tion, push the control button.

OPS043172

OPS043173

■Type B

■Type A

Features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when

the recirculated air posi-

tion is selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

passenger compartment

will be drawn through the

heating system and heat-

ed or cooled according to

the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button does not illuminate

when the outside (fresh)

air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

It should be noted that prolonged

operation of the heating in recirculat-

ed air position will cause fogging of

the windshield and side windows and

the air within the passenger com-

partment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected, will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

WARNING - Recirculated

air

Continuous use of the climate

control system in the recirculat-

ed air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

WARNING

- Reduced visibility

Continued climate control sys-

tem operation in the recirculat-

ed air position may allow

humidity to increase inside

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

120

4121

Features of your vehicle

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

When the heater or air conditioning

system is on with the sunroof

opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-

tion will be automatically selected. At

this time, if you press the recirculated

air position button, the recirculated

air position will be selected but will

change back to the outside (fresh) air

position after 3 minutes.

When the sunroof is closed, the air

intake position will return to the orig-

inal position that was selected.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the

desired speed by pressing the fan

speed control button.

To change the fan speed, press the

button ( ) for higher speed, or push

the button ( ) for lower speed. To

turn the fan speed control off, press

the OFF button and select outside

(fresh) air position.

OPS043176

OPS043177

■Type B

■Type A

Features of your vehicle

1224

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator

light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

Blower OFF

Push the OFF button to turn off the

blower. However you can still operate

the mode and air intake buttons as

long as the ignition switch is in the

position ON.

Climate information screen

selection (if equipped)

Press the climate information screen

selection button to view climate infor-

mation in full screen mode.

OPS043174

OPS043175

■Type B

■Type A

OPS043178

OPS043179

■Type B

■Type A

OPS043180

■Type B

4123

Features of your vehicle

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the

mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the vehicle through

the ventilation system, temporarily

set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. Be sure to

return the control to the fresh air

position when the irritation has

passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driv-

er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system

is drawn in through the grilles just

ahead of the windshield. Care

should be taken that these are not

blocked by leaves, snow, ice or

other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to

the fresh air position and fan speed

to the desired position, turn on the

air conditioning system, and adjust

the temperature control to desired

temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air con-

ditioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi-

tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

extreme left position, set the mode

control to the MAX A/C position,

then set the fan speed control to

the highest speed.

Features of your vehicle

1244

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system

operation, you may occasionally

notice a slight change in engine

speed as the air conditioning com-

pressor cycles. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

• When using the air conditioning

system, you may notice clear water

dripping (or even puddling) on the

ground under the passenger side

of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-

tem operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-

tem in the recirculated air position

provides maximum cooling, how-

ever, continual operation in this

mode may cause the air inside the

vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and

humid air intake. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

CAUTION - Excessive A/C

When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine

coolant closely while driving up

hills or in heavy traffic when out-

side temperatures are high. Air

conditioning system operation

may cause engine overheating

and potential engine damage.

Continue to use the blower fan

but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the engine coolant

temperature gauge indicates

engine overheating.

4125

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the

vehicle from the outside through the

heating and air conditioning system. If

dust or other pollutants accumulate in

the filter over a period of time, the air

flow from the air vents may decrease,

resulting in moisture accumulation on

the inside of the windshield even

when the outside (fresh) air position is

selected. If this happens, have the cli-

mate control air filter replaced by an

authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 15,000

miles or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty or

rough roads, more frequent air

conditioner filter inspections and

changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized Kia

dealer.

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative impact on the air con-

ditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized Kia dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

WARNING

The oil and refrigerant in your

vehicle's air conditioning sys-

tem is under very high pres-

sure. If proper service proce-

dures are not followed an explo-

sion may result. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death,

the air conditioning system in

your vehicle should only be

serviced by trained and certi-

fied technicians.

Features of your vehicle

1264

CAUTION

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used, otherwise

damage to the vehicle and

injury may occur. To prevent

damage, the air conditioning

system in your vehicle should

only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians.

4127

Features of your vehicle

• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

while defrosting or defogging, set the

mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windshield, rear win-

dow, outside rear view mirrors, and

all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

hood and air inlet in the cowl grille

to improve heater and defroster

efficiency and to reduce the proba-

bility of fogging up inside of the

windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except “0”

position.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or mode.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat-

ically.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected

automatically, press the correspon-

ding button manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OPS043181

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or posi-

tion during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temper-

ature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause

the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, causing loss of

visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan

speed control knob or button to

the lower speed.

Features of your vehicle

1284

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat-

ically.

Automatic climate control

system

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired

position.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will be turned

on according to the detected ambi-

ent temperature, outside (fresh) air

position and higher fan speed will

be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)

air position and higher fan speed are

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button or knob manu-

ally.

If the position is selected, with a

low fan speed, a higher fan speed

may be automatically selected.

OPS043182 OPS043183

OPS043185

■Type B

■Type A

4129

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-

tion.

2. Set temperature to the Maximum

(HI).

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will be turned

on according to the detected

ambient temperature and outside

(fresh) air position will be selected

automatically.

If the position is selected, with a

low fan speed, a higher fan speed

may be automatically selected.

Defogging logic

To reduce the possibility of fogging

up the inside of the windshield, the

air intake or air conditioning are con-

trolled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

position. To cancel or return to the

defogging logic, do the following.

OPS043184

OPS043186

■Type B

■Type A

Features of your vehicle

1304

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to

the defrost position ( ).

3. Within 10 seconds after select the

defrost positon, press the air

intake control button ( ) at least

5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button

blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of

interval. It indicates that the defog-

ging logic is canceled or returned to

the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, it will be reset to the

defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Press the defrost button ( ).

OPS043187

OPS043189

OPS043188

■Type B

■Type A

4131

Features of your vehicle

3. While pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake

control button ( ) at least 5

times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button

blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of

interval. It indicates that the defog-

ging logic is canceled or returned to

the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, it will be reset to the

defog logic status. When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the clean air function turns

on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off

automatically, when the ignition

switch turns to the OFF position.

OPS043206

CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

1324

These compartments can be used to

store small items.

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

• Always keep the storage compart-

ment covers closed while driving.

Do not attempt to place so many

items in the storage compartment

that the storage compartment

cover cannot close securely.

Center console storage

These compartments can be used to

store small items required by the

driver or front passenger.

To open the center console storage,

pull up the lever. (Type B)

Glove box

To open the glove box, push the but-

ton and the glove box will automati-

cally open. Close the glove box after

use.

Always keep the glove box closed

while the vehicle is in operation.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

OPS043062

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store, propane cylinders

or other flammable/explosive

materials in the vehicle. These

items may catch fire and/or

explode if the vehicle is exposed

to hot temperatures for extended

periods.

OPS043060

OPS043061

■Type B

■Type A

4133

Features of your vehicle

Cool box (if equipped)

You can keep beverage cans or other

items cool in the glove box.

1. Turn on the air conditioning.

2. Slide the open/close lever of the

vent installed in the glove box to

the open position.

3. When the cool box is not used,

slide the lever to the closed posi-

tion.

If some items in the cool box block

the vent, the cooling effectiveness of

the coolbox is reduced.

✽✽ NOTICE

Do not put perishable food in the

cool box because it may not main-

tain the necessary consistent tem-

perature to keep the food fresh.

✽✽ NOTICE

If the temperature control knob is in

the warm or hot position, warm or

hot air will flow into the glove box.

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, press

the cover and the holder will slowly

open. Place your sunglasses with the

lenses facing out.

To close the sunglass holder, push it

up.

Do not place other items in the sun-

glass holder.

OPS043064 OPS043065

Features of your vehicle

1344

Luggage box (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-

tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for

easy access.

OPS043198

WARNING - Sunglass

holder

• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-

glass holder. Such objects

can be thrown from the holder

in the event of a sudden stop

or an accident, possibly injur-

ing the passengers in the

vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass

holder while the vehicle is

moving. The rear view mirror

of the vehicle can be blocked

by an opened sunglass holder.

4135

Features of your vehicle

Cup holder

✽✽NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while

driving to prevent spilling your

drink. If liquid spills, it may get

into the vehicle's electrical/elec-

tronic system and damage electri-

cal/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do

not dry the cup holder at high

temperature. This may damage

the cup holder.

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)

To use the cup holder, folding the

center seat or pull down the armrest.

INTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING - Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups

with hot liquid in the cup holder

while the vehicle is in motion. If

the hot liquid spills, you burn

yourself. Such a burn to the

driver could lead to loss of con-

trol of the vehicle. OPS043067

■Type A

OPS043066

■Type B

OPS043068

Features of your vehicle

1364

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from the

bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension for-

ward or backward (3). (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

visor and slide the mirror cover (4).

To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch

it on. (if equipped)

The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is

provided for holding a tollgate ticket.

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm

the front seats during cold weather.

With the ignition switch in the ON

position, push either of the switches

to warm the driver's seat or the front

passenger's seat.

OVG049174

CAUTION - Vanity

mirror lamp (if equipped)

If you use the vanity mirror

lamp, turn off the lamp before

return the sunvisor to its origi-

nal position. It could result in

battery discharge and possible

sunvisor damage.

OPS033012

■Type A

OPS033013

■Type B

4137

Features of your vehicle

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the "OFF" position.

• Each time you press the switch,

the temperature setting of the seat

will change as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignition

switch is turned on.

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat

warmer operating, the seat warmer

will turn OFF.

✽✽NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION

- Seat damage

• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solvent

such as paint thinner, ben-

zene, alcohol and gasoline.

Doing so may damage the sur-

face of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the

seat warmer, do not place any-

thing on the seats that insu-

lates against heat, such as

blankets, cushions or seat

covers while the seat warmer

is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped

with seat warmers. Damage to

the seat warming components

could occur.

• Be careful not to spill liquid

such as water or beverages on

the seat. If you spill some liq-

uid, wipe the seat with a dry

towel. Before using the seat

warmer, dry the seat com-

pletely.

OFF

HIGH ( )

LOW ( )

→→

→

• Type A

OFF

HIGH ( )

MIDDLE ( )*

LOW ( )

→→→

→

• Type B

WARNING - Seat heater

burns

The seat warmer may cause

burns, even at low tempera-

tures, if used over a long period

of time. Never allow passengers

who may not be able to take

care of themselves to be

exposed to the risk of seat

heater burns.These include:

1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin

or those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills,

cold tablets, etc.)

Features of your vehicle

1384

Seat air ventilation (if equipped)

The temperature setting of the seat

changes according to the switch

position.

• If you want to cool your seat cush-

ion, press the switch (blue color).

• Each time you press the button,

the airflow will change as follows:

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat air

ventilation operating, the seat air

ventilation will turn OFF.

• The seat air ventilation defaults to

the OFF position whenever the

ignition switch is turned on.

Rear seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm

the rear outboard seats during cold

weather. With the ignition switch in

the ON position, push either of the

switches to warm rear seats.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the "OFF" position.

OPS033014

OFF

HIGH ( )

MIDDLE ( )

LOW ( )

→→→

→

CAUTION - Seat damage

• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solvent

such as paint thinner, ben-

zene, alcohol and gasoline.

Doing so may damage the air

ventilation seat.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on the seat. Those

things may damage the air

ventilation seat.

• Be careful not to spill liquid

such as water or beverages on

the seat. If you spill some liquid,

wipe the seat with a dry towel.

Before using the air ventilation

seat, dry the seat completely.

OPS033031

→

OFF →HIGH ( ) →LOW ( )

4139

Features of your vehicle

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat

warmer operating, the seat warmer

will turn OFF.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the engine

start/stop button (the ignition switch)

is turned on.

✽✽NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in

the seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION

- Seat damage

• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solvent

such as thinner, benzene, alco-

hol and gasoline. Doing so may

damage the surface of the

heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place anything

on the seats that insulates

against heat, such as blankets,

cushions or seat covers while

the seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped

with seat warmers. Damage to

the seat warming components

could occur.

• Be careful not to spill liquid

such as water or beverages on

the seat. If you spill some liquid,

wipe the seat with a dry towel.

Before using the seat warmer,

dry the seat completely.

WARNING - Seat heater

burns

The seat warmer may cause

burns, even at low tempera-

tures, if used over a long period

of time. Never allow passengers

who may not be able to take

care of themselves to be

exposed to the risk of seat

heater burns.These include:

1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin

or those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills,

cold tablets, etc.)

Features of your vehicle

1404

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or

other devices designed to operate

with vehicle electrical systems. The

devices should draw less than 10

amps with the engine running.

• Use the power outlet only when the

engine is running and remove the

accessory plug after use. Using the

accessory plug for prolonged peri-

ods of time with the engine off could

cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A(Driver’s

side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in

electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater

to the lowest operating level when

using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference when

plugged into a vehicle’s power out-

let. These devices may cause

excessive audio static and malfunc-

tions in other electronic systems or

devices used in your vehicle.

OPS043069

OPS043070

■Rear (if equipped)

■Front (Type A) WARNING - Electric

shock

Do not put a finger or a foreign

element (pin, etc.) into a power

outlet and do not touch with a

wet hand.You may get an electric

shock.

4141

Features of your vehicle

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down the

upper portion of hanger.

Be careful when opening and closing

the doors. Clothes, etc. may get

caught between the door gap.

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the

floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.

This keeps the floor mat from sliding

forward.

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floormat to the

vehicle.

• Ensure that the floormats are

securely attached to the vehicle's

floormat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floormat that can-

not be firmly attached to the vehi-

cle's floormat anchors.

• Do not stack floormats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor-

mat). Only a single floormat should

be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver's side floor-

mat anchors that are designed to

securely hold the floormat in place.

To avoid any interference with pedal

operation, Kia recommends that only

the Kia floormat designed for use in

your vehicle be installed.

OTFNCO2001

■ Driver's side ■ Passenger's side

WARNING - After market

floor mat

Do not install aftermarket floor

mats that are not capable of

being securely attached to the

vehicle's floor mat anchors.

Unsecured floor mats can inter-

fere with pedal operation.

CAUTION - Hanging

clothing

Do not hang heavy clothes,

since those may damage the

hook.

ORP042186

Features of your vehicle

1424

Luggage net holder

(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the

cargo area, you can use the holders

located in the cargo area to attach

the luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorized

Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.

To prevent damage to the goods or

the vehicle, care should be taken

when carrying fragile or bulky objects

in the luggage compartment.

Cargo area cover (if equipped)

Use the cargo area cover to hide

items stored in the cargo area.

WARNING - Luggage net

• Always keep your face and

body out of the luggage net

recoil path and avoid using

the luggage net when the

straps have visible signs of

wear or damage. The luggage

net can snap and cause

injuries.

• All cargo should be evenly

distributed, properly secured

and never piled higher than

the seatback.

OPS043193

OPS043199

4143

Features of your vehicle

To use the cargo area cover, insert

the 4 edges into the slots.

WARNING - Objects

• Do not place objects on the

cargo area cover. Such

objects may be thrown about

inside the vehicle and possi-

bly injure vehicle occupants

during an accident or when

braking.

• All cargo should be evenly

distributed, properly secured

and never piled higher than

the seatback.

CAUTION - Luggage

Since the cargo area cover may

be damaged or malformed, do

not apply excessive force to the

cover or do not put the heavy

loads on it.

OPS043200

Features of your vehicle

1444

Mounting bracket for roof carrier

(if equipped)

To install or remove a roof carrier,

you can use the mounting bracket

and cover on the roof.

When you install a roof carrier, do

the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade

driver) into the slot and slide the

cover toward the arrow on the

cover.

2. Rotate the cover half way and

insert the cover on the roof hole as

the illustration.

✽✽NOTICE

To prevent losing the roof carrier

cover, install the cover on the roof

before you install the roof carrier.

3. After using the roof carrier, install

the cover back on the roof in the

reverse order.

✽✽NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-

roof, be sure not to position cargo

onto the roof in such a way that it

could interfere with sunroof opera-

tion.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

OED046091

OPS043207

CAUTION -Loading roof

rack

When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-

tions to make sure the cargo

does not damage the roof of the

vehicle.

4145

Features of your vehicle

• When carrying large objects on the

roof, make sure they do not exceed

the overall roof length or width.

• The vehicle center of gravity will be

higher when items are loaded onto

the roof. Avoid sudden starts, brak-

ing, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers

or high speeds that may result in

loss of vehicle control or rollover

resulting in an accident.

• To prevent damage or loss of cargo

while driving, check frequently

before or while driving to make

sure the items on the roof are

securely fastened.

WARNING - Driving with

roof load

Always drive slow and turn cor-

ners carefully when carrying

items on the roof rack.The vehi-

cle center of gravity will be

higher when items are loaded

onto the roof rack.

Features of your vehicle

1464

If you install aftermarket HID head

lamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec-

tronic devices may malfunction.

Antenna (if equipped)

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to

receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-

nals.

This antenna pole is removable. To

remove the roof antenna pole, turn it

counterclockwise. To install the roof

antenna pole, turn it clockwise.

• When reinstalling your roof anten-

na, it is important that it is fully

tightened and adjusted to the

upright position to ensure proper

reception.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

OHM048154N

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION - Antenna

Before entering a place with a

low height clearance or a car

wash, remove the antenna pole

by rotating it counterclockwise.

If not, the antenna may be dam-

aged.

4147

Features of your vehicle

Audio remote control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote

control button may be installed.

Do not operate the audio remote

control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1)

• Push the VOL + to increase volume.

• Push the VOL - to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for 1 second or more, it will

work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK

select button.

USB mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for less than 1 second, it will

work as follows in each mode.

OPS043190

WARNING

Driving while distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol that may lead to an acci-

dent, severe personal injury and

death. The driver’s primary

responsibility is in the safe and

legal operation of a vehicle, and

use of any handheld devices,

other equipment or vehicle sys-

tems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a

vehicle or that are not permissi-

ble by law should never be used

during operation of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

1484

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION select buttons.

USB mode

It will function as the FILE UP/DOWN

button.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio,

USB or AUX.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons is described in the following

pages in this section.

Aux, USB and iPod®* port

(if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port or

iPod®port, you can use an aux port

to connect audio devices and an USB

port to plug in an USB and also an

iPod®port to plug in an iPod®.

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source of

the portable audio device.

*iPod®is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

OPS043194

4149

Features of your vehicle

Speaker lights (if equipped)

The speaker lights that lights around

the front speaker is adjusted by turn-

ing the knob as follows.

1. OFF : The light turns off.

2. MUSIC :

The red light blinks according to the

sound of the audio.

If the audio is not turned on, the

light does not turn on.

3. MOOD :

The light color changes automati-

cally at regular interval.

4. +/- :

When the lights are on, push the

illumination button to adjust the

light intensity.

If low lighting grade is selected, the

intensity of light may be weak or

may not illuminate according to the

audio volume or selected condition.

The lighting around the front speaker

may not illuminate when the sound of

the audio is low.

Do not use the lights for extended

periods when engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

✽✽NOTICE

When the doors are opened, the

lighting system will not operate.

OPS043195

OPS043196

Features of your vehicle

1504

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-

cast from transmitter towers located

around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-

cle. This signal is then processed by

the radio and sent to your vehicle

speakers.

However, in some cases the signal

coming to your vehicle may not be

strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as

the distance from the radio station,

closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,

bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broad-

casts. This is because AM radio

waves are transmitted at low fre-

quencies. These long distance,low

frequency radio waves can follow the

curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight. In addition, they

curve around obstructions resulting

in better signal coverage.

¢¢¢

JBM002

AM reception

¢¢¢

JBM001

FM reception

4151

Features of your vehicle

FM broadcasts are transmitted at

high frequencies and do not bend to

follow the earth's surface. Because

of this, FM broadcasts generally

begin to fade within short distances

from the station. Also, FM signals are

easily affected by buildings, moun-

tains, and obstructions. This can

lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-

tening conditions which might lead

you to believe a problem exists with

your radio. The following conditions

are normal and do not indicate radio

trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves

away from the radio station, the

signal will weaken and sound will

begin to fade. When this occurs,

we suggest that you select another

stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the

transmitter and your radio can dis-

turb the signal causing static or

fluttering noises to occur. Reducing

the treble level may lessen this

effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-

nal weakens, another more power-

ful signal near the same frequency

may begin to play. This is because

your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs,

select another station with a

stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio

signals being received from sever-

al directions can cause distortion

or fluttering. This can be caused by

a direct and reflected signal from

the same station, or by signals

from two stations with close fre-

quencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition

has passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM005

¢¢¢

JBM004

Features of your vehicle

1524

Using a cellular phone or a two-

way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside

the vehicle, noise may be produced

from the audio system. This does not

mean that something is wrong with

the audio equipment. In such a case,

try to operate mobile devices as far

from the audio equipment as possi-

ble.

When using a communication sys-

tem such as a cellular phone or a

radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-

rate external antenna must be fitted.

When a cellular phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adversely

affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING - Cell phone

use

Do not use a cellular phone

while driving. Stop at a safe

location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING - Driver

Distraction

• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at the

screen for prolonged periods

of time could lead to traffic

accidents.

• Using the phone while driving

may lead to a lack of attention

of traffic conditions and

increase the likelihood of

accidents. Use the phone fea-

ture after parking the vehicle.

WARNING - Audio System

Do not disassemble, assemble,

or modify the audio system.

Such acts could result in fire or

electric shock.

WARNING - Antenna

Do not touch the antenna dur-

ing thunder or lightening as

such acts may lead to lightning

induced electric shock.

CAUTION

Refrain from use if the screen is

blank or no sound can be hear

as these signs may indicate

product malfunction.

4153

Features of your vehicle

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle. Driving

in a state where external sounds

cannot be heard may lead to acci-

dents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting

when turning the device on. A sud-

den output of extreme volume

upon turning the device on could

lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust

the volume to a suitable levels

before turning off the device.)

WARNING - Driver dis-

traction

Operating the device while driv-

ing could lead to accidents due

to a lack of attention to external

surroundings. Park the vehicle

before attempting to set or pro-

gram the device.

CAUTION

• Turn on the car ignition before

using the audio system Do not

operate the audio system for

long periods of time with the

ignition turned off as such

operations may lead to battery

discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause dam-

age to the LCD or touch

screen.

• When cleaning the device,

make sure to turn off the

audio system and use a dry

and smooth cloth. Never use

tough materials, chemical

cloths, or solvents (alcohol,

benzene, thinners, etc.) as

such materials may damage

the device panel or cause

color/quality deterioration

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system. Spilling

beverages may lead to system

malfunction.

• In case of product malfunc-

tion, please contact your place

of purchase or After Service

center.

• Placing the audio system

within an electromagnetic

environment may result in

noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions

such as perfume and cosmet-

ic oil from contacting the

dashboard because they may

cause damage or discol-

oration.

Features of your vehicle

1544

USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-

nected when starting up the

vehicle. Connect the device after

starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or

turned off while the external USB

device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-

thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate

between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression

rate between 8Kbps ~

320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-

tricity when connecting or discon-

necting the external USB device.

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the

connected external USB device

can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB device is

not either 512BYTE or

2048BYTE, then the device will

not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device format-

ted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in con-

tact with the human body or

other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-

connect the USB device in a

short period of time, it may break

the device.

(Continued)

• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnect-

ing a USB device.

• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback in

USB mode, the external USB

device can be damaged or may

malfunction. Therefore, discon-

nect the external USB device

when the audio is turned off or in

another mode. (e.g, Radio)

• Depending on the type and

capacity of the external USB

device or the type of the files

stored in the device, there is a

difference in the time for recogni-

tion the device.

• Do not use the USB device for

purposes other than playing

music files.

• Playing videos through the USB

is not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

(Continued)

4155

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory read-

ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,

etc.) or external-HDD type

devices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory

may be lost while using this

audio. Always back up important

data on a personal storage

device.

• Please avoid using

USB memory prod-

ucts which can be

used as key chains or

cellular phone acces-

sories as they could cause dam-

age to the USB jack. Please

make certain only to use plug

type connector products.

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a

USB hub purchased separately,

the vehicle’s audio system may

not recognize the USB device. In

that case, connect the USB

device directly to the multimedia

terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by

logical drives, only the music

files on the highest-priority drive

are recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Cellular phone/Digital camera

can be unrecognizable by stan-

dard USB I/F can be unrecogniz-

able.

• Charging through the USB may

not be supported in some mobile

devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to

connection failures due to vehi-

cle vibrations are not supported.

(i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB

devices (METAL COVER TYPE

USB) can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1564

(Continued)

• Some iPod®devices, such as the

iPhone®, can be connected

through the

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology interface. The device

must have audio

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology capability

(such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology ).

The device can play, but it will not

be controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod®features within the

audio, use the cable provided upon

purchasing an iPod®device.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-

acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®

device.

• If your iPhone®is connected to

both the

Bluetooth

®Wireless

Technology and USB, only support

iPod®mode because the sound

may not be properly played in

Bluetooth

®Audio Streaming. To

use

Bluetooth

®Audio Streaming,

disconnect iPod®cable with

iPhone®.

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod®with the

iPod®Power Cable, insert the con-

nector to the multimedia socket

completely. If not inserted com-

pletely, communications between

iPod®and audio may be interrupt-

ed.

• When adjusting the sound effects

of the iPod®and the audio system,

the sound effects of both devices

will overlap and might reduce or

distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod®when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume, and

turn off the equalizer of the audio

system when using the equalizer of

an iPod®.

• When not using iPod®with car

audio, detach the iPod®cable from

iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®may

remain in accessory mode, and

may not work properly.

USING iPod®DEVICE

iPhone®is a registered grademark of

Apple inc.

• Some iPod®models may not sup-

port communication protocol and

files may not properly play.

Supported iPod®models:

- iPhone®3GS/4

- iPod®touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod®nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod®classic

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod®can be different

from the order searched in the

audio system.

• If the iPod®is disabled due to its

own malfunction, reset the iPod®.

(Reset: Refer to iPod®manual)

• An iPod®may not operate normally

on low battery.

(Continued)

4157

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology(if equipped)

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

The

Bluetooth

word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of

such marks by Kia is under license.

Bluetooth

enabled call phone is

required to use

Bluetooth

wireless

technology.

Before Using the

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree

What is Bluetooth®?

•

Bluetooth

refers to a short-distance

wireless networking technology

which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz

frequency to connect various

devices within a certain distance.

• Supported within PCs, external

devices,

Bluetooth

phones, PDAs,

various electronic devices, and

automotive environments,

Bluetooth

allows data to be trans-

mitted at high speeds without hav-

ing to use a connector cable.

•

Bluetooth

Handsfree refers to a

device which allows the user to

conveniently make phone calls with

Bluetooth

mobile phones through

the audio system.

•

Bluetooth

Handsfree may not be

supported in some mobile phones.

To learn more about mobile device

compatibility, visit www.kia.com.

Precautions for Safe Driving

•

Bluetooth

Handsfree is a feature

that enables drivers to practice

safe driving. Connecting the head

unit with a

Bluetooth

phone allows

the user to conveniently make and

receive calls and use contacts.

Before using

Bluetooth

, carefully

read the contents of this user’s

manual.

• Excessive use or operations while

driving may lead to negligent driv-

ing practices and result in acci-

dents. Refrain from excessive

operations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged

periods of time is dangerous and

may lead to accidents. When driv-

ing, view the screen only for short

periods of time.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle control

that may lead to an accident,

severe personal injury, and

death. The driver’s primary

responsibility is in the safe and

legal operation of a vehicle, and

use of any handheld devices,

other equipment, or vehicle sys-

tems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a vehi-

cle or which are not permissible

by law should never be used dur-

ing operation of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

1584

When connecting a

Bluetooth®

Phone

• Before connecting the head unit

with the mobile phone, check to

see that the mobile phone sup-

ports

Bluetooth

features.

• Even if the phone supports

Bluetooth

, the phone will not be

found during device searches if the

phone has been set to hidden state

or the

Bluetooth

power is turned

off. Disable the hidden state or turn

on the

Bluetooth

power prior to

searching/connecting with the

Head unit.

• If you do not want automatic con-

nection with your

Bluetooth

device, turn off the

Bluetooth

fea-

ture within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and

quality may differ depending on the

mobile phone.

• Park the vehicle when connecting

the head unit with the mobile

phone.

•

Bluetooth

connection may

become intermittently disconnect-

ed in some mobile phones. Follow

these steps to try again.

1.Within the mobile phone, turn

the

Bluetooth

function off/on

and try again.

2.Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3.Reboot the audio system and try

again.

4.Delete all paired devices, pair

and try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may differ depending on the model

of your mobile phone.

4159

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition

• When using the voice recognition

feature, only commands listed

within the user's manual are sup-

ported.

• Be aware that during the operation

of the voice recognition system,

pressing any key other than the

• For superior voice recognition per-

formance, position the microphone

used for voice recognition above

the head of the driver’s seat and

maintain a proper position when

saying commands.

• Within the following situations,

voice recognition may not function

properly due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof

are open

- When the blower AC/heater is set

to high

- When entering and passing

through tunnels

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged and

uneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands

can be used only when a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a

name, the corresponding contact

must be downloaded and stored

within the audio system.

• After downloading the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone book,

it takes some times to convert the

phone book data into voice infor-

mation. During this time, voice

recognition may not properly oper-

ate.

• Pronounce the voice commands

naturally and clearly as if in a nor-

mal conversation.

Features of your vehicle

1604

■■ AUDIO : AM1A0B2AN, AM1A0B2KN

PS34001N

4161

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

AND FUNCTIONS

❈Display and settings may differ

depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit

(1)

Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXMTM mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2 ➟AM ➟SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟SAT3.

❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up

screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

(2)

Changes to USB(iPod®), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of

USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

❈In Setup>Display, the media pop

up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

(3)

Operates Phone Screen

❈When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is dis-

played.

(4)

Briefly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,

Clock, Phone, System setting modes

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Move to the Time setting screen

(5)

Radio Mode : Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.

USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Briefly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Moves to next or previ-

ous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards

the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or

previous song(file)

❈The Play/Pause feature may oper-

ate differently depending on the

mobile phone.

SEEK

TRACK

SETUP

CLOCK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

PS34001N

Features of your vehicle

1624

(6) PWR/VOL knob

Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob

Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

(7) ~ (Preset)

Radio mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-

quencies (channels)

USB, iPod®, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and

Menu pop up screen, the number

menu is selected.

(8)

Each time the button is pressed, it

sets the screen Off ➟Screen On ➟

Screen Off

❈Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off.

In the screen Off state, press any

key to turn the screen On again.

(9)

Radio mode

- Shortly press the key : Previews

each broadcast for 5 seconds

each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broadcasts

saved in Preset ~ for 5

seconds each.

❈Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

frequency.

❈SAT Radio does not support the

Preset scan feature.

USB, My Music mode

- Briefly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song

(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

song (file).

(10)

Displays menus for the current mode.

❈iPod List : Move to parent category

SCAN

DISP

2 RDM

1 RPT

PS34001N

4163

Features of your vehicle

(11)

Go to previous depth(no previous

screen)

(12)

Radio mode

- SiriusXMTM RADIO : Category

- USB mode : Folder Search

(13) TUNE knob

AM/FM mode :

- Changes frequency by turning the

knob left/right.

SiriusXMTM Radio Mode:

- Changes the station by turning the

knob left/right. Press knob to

select station.

USB, iPod®, My Music mode:

- Searches songs (files) by turning

the knob left/right.

❈When the desired song is displayed,

press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus

and selects menus.

CAT

FOLDER

BACK

Features of your vehicle

1644

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes /

selection mode

• During On state, press the

or key to display the mode

change pop up screen.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the

desired display info from ‘Folder/File’

or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

MEDIA

RADIO

OffOn

SETUP

4165

Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Sound]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Sound Settings

This menu allows you to set the

‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound

Fader and Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select

menu through

TUNE knob

Tur n

TUNE knob

left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the

sound tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound

fader and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈Back : While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature will gradually increase

the volume as speed increases to

offset outside noise.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set

[On/Off] of TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set

volume of

TUNE

knob

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1664

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Clock]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Sound Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈Adjust the number currently in

focus to set the [hour] and press

the tune knob to set the [minute]

and [AM/PM].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date

(MM/DD/YYYY).

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈Adjust the number currently in

focus to make the settings and

press the tune knob to move to the

next setting. (Set in order of

Year/Month/Day)

Time Format

This function is used to set the

12/24 hour time format of the

audio system. Select [Time

Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through

TUNE

knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set

through

TUNE

knob

: Displays time/date on screen

: Turn off.

Off

SETUP

CLOCK

4167

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select

[System] Select menu through

TUNE knob

Memory Information

Displays currently used memory and

total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is dis-

played on the left side while the total

system memory is displayed on the

right side.

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voice

command feedback between Normal

and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] Set

through

TUNE

knob

• On : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailed

instructions during voice command

operation.

• Off : This mode is for expert users

and omits some information during

voice command operation. (When

using Expert mode, guidance

instructions can be heard through

the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display

and voice recognition language.

Select [Language]

Set through TUNE knob

❈The system will reboot after the

language is changed.

❈Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1684

RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUSTM

SEEK

Press the key

• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Automatically searches

for the next station.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): While holding the key,

frequency changes without stop-

ping. When the key is released,

automatically searches for the next

frequency from that point.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency

saved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding

the desired key from ~

will save the currently playing

broadcast to the selected key and

sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the key

• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): The broadcast frequency

increases and previews each

broadcast for 5 seconds each. After

scanning all frequencies, returns

and plays the current broadcast fre-

quency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-

casts saved in Preset ~

for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

adjust the frequency.

• FM : Changes by 200KHz

• AM : Changes by 10KHz

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

4169

Features of your vehicle

Within key are the A.Store

(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store

Press the key Set [A.Store]

through TUNE knob or key.

Saves broadcasts with superior

reception to ~ keys. If no

frequencies are received, then the

most recently received frequency will

be broadcast.

Features of your vehicle

1704

Satellite Radio channels:

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio offers

150+ channels with 100% commer-

cial-free music, plus sports, news,

talk and entertainment, available

nationwide in your vehicle. For more

information and a complete list of

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio channels,

visit www.siriusxm.com in the United

States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada,

or call SiriusXMTM at 1-800-643-2112.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

satellite radio antenna located on the

roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof

provides the best location for an

unobstructed, open view of the sky, a

requirement of a satellite radio sys-

tem. Like AM/FM, there are several

factors that can affect satellite radio

reception performance:

• Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep the

antenna clear of snow and ice build-

up and keep luggage and other

material as far away from the anten-

na as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-

ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over-

passes, parking garages, dense

tree foliage and thunderstorms can

interfere with your reception.

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio is a sub-

scription-based satellite radio service

that broadcasts music, sports, news

and entertainment programming to

radio receivers, which are available for

installation in motor vehicles or factory

installed, as well as for the home,

portable and wireless devices, and

through an Internet connection on per-

sonal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a fac-

tory installed SiriusXMTM Satellite

Radio system include:

• Hardware and an introductory trial

subscription term, which begins on

the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXMTM music channels, and other

select channels over the Internet

using any computer connected to the

Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended sub-

scription terms, contact SiriusXMTM

at 1-866-635-2349.

NOTE:

All SiriusXMTM services require a

subscription, sold separately or

as a package, after 3-month trial

included with vehicle purchase or

lease. If you decide to continue

your SiriusXMTM service at the end

of your trial subscription, the plan

you choose will automatically

renew and bill at then-current

rates until you call us at 1-866-

635-2349 to cancel. See our

Customer Agreement for com-

plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.

Other fees and taxes apply. All

fees and programming are subject

to change. Sirius satellite service

is available only to those at least

18 and older in the 48 contiguous

USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage

limitations). Our Internet radio

service is available throughout

our satellite service area and in

AK and HI. Certain channels are

not available on our Internet radio

service or on mobile devices.

XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of SiriusXMTM

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio information

4171

Features of your vehicle

SiriusXMTM RADIO

Using SiriusXMTM Satellite

Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3

month complimentary period of

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio so you

have access to over 220 channels of

music, information, and entertain-

ment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your

subscription to SiriusXMTM Satellite

Radio, you will need to contact

SiriusXMTM Customer Care at 1-800-

643-2112. Have your 12 digit SID

(Sirius Identification Number) / ESN

(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To

retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the

radio, press the [RADIO] button, and

tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need

to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and

have an unobstructed view of the sky

in order for the radio to receive the

activation signal.

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): select previous or next

channel.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): continuously move

to previous or next channel.

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the

current category.

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1724

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-

cast for 10 seconds each

❈Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

frequency

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the

current category.

other problems. To minimize the

problems of winter driving, you

should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tires

on your tires. If snow tires are need-

ed, it is necessary to select tires

equivalent in size and type of the

original equipment tires. Failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety

and handling of your vehicle.

Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-

eration, sudden brake applications,

and sharp turns are potentially very

hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine

braking to the fullest extent. Sudden

brake applications on snowy or icy

roads may cause skids to occur. You

need to keep sufficient distance

between the vehicle in operation in

front of your vehicle. Also, apply the

brake gently.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehi-

cle, make sure they are radial tires of

the same size and load range as the

original tires. Mount snow tires on all

four wheels to balance your vehicle’s

handling in all weather conditions.

Keep in mind that the traction provid-

ed by snow tires on dry roads may

not be as high as your vehicle's orig-

inal equipment tires.You should drive

cautiously even when the roads are

clear. Check with the tire dealer for

maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local, state and munic-

ipal regulations for possible restric-

tions against their use.

WINTER DRIVING

1VQA3005

Driving your vehicle

565

Use high quality ethylene gly-

col coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because

it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water

pump and prevents freezing. Be sure

to replace or replenish your coolant

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in section 7. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure

that its freezing point is sufficient for

the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on

the battery system. Visually inspect

the battery and cables as described

in section 7. The level of charge in

your battery can be checked by an

authorized Kia dealer or a service

station.

Change to "winter weight" oil

if necessary

In some climates it is recommended

that a lower viscosity "winter weight"

oil be used during cold weather. See

section 8 for recommendations. If

you aren't sure what weight oil you

should use, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni-

tion system

Inspect your spark plugs as

described in section 7 and replace

them if necessary. Also check all

ignition wiring and components to be

sure they are not cracked, worn or

damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing,

squirt an approved de-icer fluid or

glycerine into the key opening. If a

lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove

the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,

you may be able to thaw it out by

using a heated key. Handle the heat-

ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window

washer system from freezing, add an

approved window washer anti-freeze

solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container.Window wash-

er anti-freeze is available from an

authorized Kia dealer and most auto

parts outlets. Do not use engine

coolant or other types of anti-freeze

as these may damage the paint fin-

ish.

557

Driving your vehicle

Don’t let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position. This is most likely to hap-

pen when there is an accumulation

of snow or ice around or near the

rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.

If there is a risk the parking brake

may freeze, apply it only temporarily

while you put the gear shift lever in P

(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first

or reverse gear (manual transaxle)

and block the rear wheels so the

vehicle cannot roll. Then release the

parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accu-

mulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and

ice can build up under the fenders

and interfere with the steering. When

driving in severe winter conditions

where this may happen, you should

periodically check underneath the

vehicle to be sure the movement of

the front wheels and the steering

components are not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the

weather, you should carry appropri-

ate emergency equipment. Some of

the items you may want to carry

include tow straps or chains, flash-

light, emergency flares, sand, shov-

el, jumper cables, window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-

ket, etc.

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

Driving your vehicle

585

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-

mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity

weight.

Tire and loading information label

OPS053100N/OPS053104N/OPS053102N/OPS053101N/OPS053103N/OPS053105N

559

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight:

375 kg (827 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total - 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Driving your vehicle

605

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants and the tongue load, if

your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1.Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-

ard.

2.Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg

(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68

kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity is

295 kg (650 lbs).

(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or

1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle.

561

Driving your vehicle

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight

and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's

capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 (300 lbs)

Available Cargo and

499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

ABC

C190F02JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 (750 lbs)

Available Cargo and

295 kg

Luggage weight (650 lbs)

ABC

Example 2

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5 (860 lbs)

Available Cargo and

245 kg

Luggage weight (540 lbs)

ABC

Example 3

Driving your vehicle

625

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pil-

lar.

This label shows the maximum

allowable weight of the fully loaded

vehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The

GVWR includes the weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, fuel and

cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go

to a weigh station and weigh your

vehicle.Your dealer can help you with

this. Be sure to spread out your load

equally on both sides of the center-

line.

The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment

your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or

anything else - they are moving as

fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop

or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,

the items will keep going and can

cause an injury if they strike the driv-

er or a passenger.

✽✽NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause

damage. Repairs would not be cov-

ered by your warranty. Do not over-

load your vehicle.

WARNING -Over loading

Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your vehi-

cle's tires and possible tire fail-

ure, increased stopping dis-

tances and poor vehicle han-

dling all of which may result in a

crash.

WARNING -Over loading

Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle and

vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

affect your vehicle’s handling

and braking ability.

563

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - Loose cargo

Do not travel with unsecured

blunt objects in the passenger

compartment of your vehicle

(e.g. suit cases or unsecured

child seats). These items may

strike occupant during a sud-

den stop or crash.

Driving your vehicle

645

This section will guide you in the

proper loading of your vehicle and/or

trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle

weight within its design rating capa-

bility, with or without a trailer.

Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of the vehi-

cle design performance. Before load-

ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determin-

ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with

or without a trailer, from the vehicle's

specifications and the certification

label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added

to the Base Curb Weight, including

cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR

(Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single

axle (front or rear). These numbers

are shown on the certification label.

The total load on each axle must

never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR

(Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR

is shown on the certification label

located on the driver’s door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY

What to do in an emergency

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-18

• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-23

• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

• Emergency towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves

as a warning to other drivers to exer-

cise extreme caution when

approaching, overtaking, or passing

your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

Depress the flasher switch with the

ignition switch in any position. The

flasher switch is located in the center

console switch panel. All turn signal

lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using

the hazard warning flasher while

the vehicle is being towed.

OPS063001

What to do in an emergency

If the engine stalls at a cross-

road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the

vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while

driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driv-

ing:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow

down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immedi-

ately or attempt to pull off the road

as this may cause a loss of control.

When the vehicle has slowed to

such a speed that it is safe to do

so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on a firm level

ground. If you are on a divided

highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn

on your emergency hazard flash-

ers, set the parking brake and put

the transaxle in P (Park, automatic

transaxle) or reverse (manual

transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow

the instruction provided later in this

section.

If the engine stalls while driv-

ing

1.Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.

3.Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an

authorized Kia dealer or seek other

qualified assistance.

✽✽NOTICE

If there was a check engine light and

loss of power or stall and if safe to do

so to wait at least 10 seconds to

restart the vehicle after it stalls. This

may reset the car so it will no longer

run at low power (limp home) condi-

tion.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or

turns over slowly

1.If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever is

in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the

emergency brake is set.

2.Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is dis-

charged.

4.Check the starter connections to

be sure they are securely tight-

ened.

5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to

start it. See instructions for "Jump

starting".

If engine turns over normally

but does not start

1.Check the fuel level.

2.With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connec-

tors at the ignition coils and spark

plugs. Reconnect any that may be

disconnected or loose.

3.Check the fuel line in the engine

compartment.

4.If the engine still does not start, call

an authorized Kia dealer or seek

other qualified assistance.

WARNING - Push/pull

start

Do not push or pull the vehicle

to start it. Push or pull starting

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload and create a

fire hazard.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order

and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid

harm to yourself or damage to your

vehicle or battery, follow these jump

starting procedures. If in doubt, we

strongly recommend that you have a

competent technician or towing serv-

ice jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION- 12 volt battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-

tem. You can damage a 12-volt

starting motor, ignition system,

and other electrical parts

beyond repair by use of a 24-

volt power supply (either two

12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as

this may cause the battery to

rupture or explode causing seri-

ous injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged

battery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

WARNING

- Frozen batteries

Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte

level is low as the battery may

rupture or explode.

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure

1.Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative termi-

nal is grounded.

2.If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to

come in contact.

3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4.Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one end of a

jumper cable to the positive termi-

nal of the discharged battery (1),

then connect the other end to the

positive terminal of the booster

battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the

other jumper cable to the negative

terminal of the booster battery (3),

then the other end to a solid, sta-

tionary, metallic point (for example,

the engine lifting bracket) away

from the battery (4). Do not con-

nect it to or near any part that

moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the correct

battery terminals or the correct

ground. Do not lean over the bat-

tery when making connections.

5.Start the engine of the vehicle with

the booster battery and let it run at

2,000 rpm, then start the engine of

the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

If the cause of your battery discharg-

ing is not apparent, you should have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Battery

Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery

produces hydrogen gas which

will explode if exposed to flame

or sparks.

WARNING - Sulfuric acid

risk

When jump starting your vehi-

cle be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

vehicle. Automobile batteries

contain sulfuric acid. This is

poisonous and highly corro-

sive.

WARNING - Battery

cables

Do not connect the jumper

cable from the negative terminal

of the booster battery to the

negative terminal of the dis-

charged battery. This can cause

the discharged battery to over-

heat and crack, releasing bat-

tery acid.

What to do in an emergency

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxle lock system cannot be

push-started.

Follow the directions in this section

for jump-starting.

WARNING- Tow starting

vehicle

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge for-

ward when the engine starts

could cause a collision with the

tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates

overheating, you experience a loss

of power, or hear loud pinging or

knocking, the engine will probably be

too hot. If this happens, you should:

1.Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,

automatic transaxle) or Neutral

(manual transaxle) and set the

parking brake. If the air condition-

ing is on, turn it off.

3.If engine coolant is running out

under the vehicle or steam is com-

ing out from underneath the hood,

stop the engine. Do not open the

hood until the coolant has stopped

running or the steaming has

stopped. If there is no visible loss

of engine coolant and no steam,

leave the engine running and

check to be sure the engine cool-

ing fan is operating. If the fan is not

running, turn the engine off.

4.Check to see if the water pump

drive belt is missing. If it is not

missing, check to see that it is

tight. If the drive belt seems to be

satisfactory, check for coolant leak-

ing from the radiator, hoses or

under the vehicle. (If the air condi-

tioning had been in use, it is nor-

mal for cold water to be draining

from it when you stop).

5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-

ken or engine coolant is leaking

out, stop the engine immediately

and call the nearest authorized Kia

dealer for assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,

carefully add coolant to the reser-

voir to bring the fluid level in the

reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

call an authorized Kia dealer for

assistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system

and this should be checked as soon

as possible by an authorized Kia

dealer.

WARNING - Uncler the

hood

While the engine is running,

keep hair, hands and clothing

away from moving parts such

as the fan and drive belts to pre-

vent injury.

WARNING- Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This

may result in coolant being

blown out of the opening and

cause serious burns.

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools (if equipped)

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut

wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment.

Pull up the luggage box cover to

reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

while the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

OPS063003

WARNING - Changing

tires

Never attempt vehicle repairs in

the traffic lanes of a public road

or highway.

WARNING - Tire Jack

Do not place any portion of your

body under a vehicle that is

only supported by a jack since

the vehicle can easily roll off the

jack. Use vehicle support

stands.

What to do in an emergency

106

• Always move the vehicle complete-

ly off the road and onto the shoul-

der before trying to change a tire.

The jack should be used on a firm

level ground. If you cannot find a

firm, level place off the road, call a

towing service company for assis-

tance.

• Be sure to use the correct front and

rear jacking positions on the vehi-

cle; never use the bumpers or any

other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Make sure any children present

are in a secure place away from

the road and from the vehicle to be

raised with the jack.

Removing and storing the

spare tire (if equipped)

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of

removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from “rattling” while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Changing tires

1.Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R

(Reverse) with manual transaxle or

P (Park) with automatic transaxle.

3.Activate the hazard warning flash-

ers.

OAM069008

1VQA4022

WARNING - Running

vehicle on jack

Do not start or run the engine of

the vehicle while the vehicle is

on the jack as this may cause

the vehicle to fall off the jack.

611

What to do in an emergency

4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5.Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

from the jack position.

• To prevent vehicle movement while

changing a tire, always set the

parking brake fully, and always

block the wheel diagonally oppo-

site the wheel being changed.

• We recommend that the wheels of

the vehicle be blocked, and that no

person remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-

clockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tire

has been raised off the ground.

1VQA4023 OPS063004

What to do in an emergency

126

7.Place the jack at the front (1) or

rear (2) jacking position closest to

the tire you are changing. Place the

jack at the designated locations

under the frame.

8.Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 30 mm. (1 in).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove

them with your fingers. Slide the

wheel off the studs and lay it flat so

it cannot roll away. To put the wheel

on the hub, pick up the spare tire,

line up the holes with the studs and

slide the wheel onto them. If this is

difficult, tip the wheel slightly and

get the top hole in the wheel lined

up with the top stud.Then jiggle the

wheel back and forth until the

wheel can slide over the other

studs.

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid possi-

ble severe injury. Before putting the

wheel into place, be sure that there

is nothing on the hub or wheel (such

as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-

vents the wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

OAM069009

OPS063006

OPS063005

613

What to do in an emergency

10. To install the wheel, hold it on the

studs, put the wheel nuts on the

studs and tighten them finger

tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is

completely seated, then tighten

the nuts as much as possible

with your fingers again.

11. Insert the wrench into the jack

and lower the vehicle to the

ground by turning the wheel nut

wrench counterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut. Do not stand

on the wrench handle or use an

extension pipe over the wrench han-

dle. Go around the wheel tightening

every nut following the numerical

sequence shown in the image until

they are all tight. Then double-check

each nut for tightness. After changing

wheels, have an authorized Kia deal-

er tighten the wheel nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)

WARNING - Installing a

wheel

Make sure the wheel makes

good contact with the hub when

installed. If the contact of the

mounting surface between the

wheel and hub is not good, the

wheel nuts could come loose

and cause the loss of a wheel.

Loss of a wheel may result in

loss of control of the vehicle. OPS063007

What to do in an emergency

146

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap

is not replaced, dust and dirt may get

into the tire valve and air may leak

from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,

buy another and install it as soon as

possible.

After you have changed the wheels,

always secure the flat tire in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations. Note that most lug nuts do not have

metric threads. Be sure to use

extreme care in checking for thread

style before installing aftermarket lug

nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an

authorized Kia dealer.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire

from rattling while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing the

spare tire. Adjust it to the specified

pressure, if necessary. Refer to

“Tires and wheels” in chapter 8.

CAUTION - Reusing lug

nuts

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud will

not secure the wheel to the hub

properly and will damage the

stud so that it must be replaced.

WARNING -Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel.This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a colli-

sion.

615

What to do in an emergency

Important - use of compact spare

tire (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a com-

pact spare tire. This compact spare

tire takes up less space than a regu-

lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a

conventional tire and is designed for

temporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-

ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after

installing the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,

observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a

higher speed could damage the

tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly

enough for the road conditions to

avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,

such as a pothole or debris, could

seriously damage the compact

spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire

could result in tire failure, loss of

vehicle control, and possible per-

sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-

mum load rating or the load-carry-

ing capacity shown on the sidewall

of the compact spare tire.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in

use. The compact spare

should be replaced by the

proper conventional tire and

rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle

is not recommended with

more than one compact spare

tire in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for

emergency use only. Do not

operate your vehicle on this

compact spare at speeds over

50 mph (80 km/h). The original

tire should be repaired or

replaced as soon as possible to

avoid failure of the spare possi-

bly leading to personal injury or

death.

What to do in an emergency

166

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The

compact spare tire diameter is

smaller than the diameter of a con-

ventional tire and reduces the

ground clearance approximately

25 mm (1 inch), which could result

in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic vehicle wash while the

compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow tires,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the compact spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other vehicle com-

ponents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

617

What to do in an emergency

Jack label 1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles

with manual transmission or move

the shift lever to the P position on

vehicles with automatic transmis-

sion.

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacturer

11. Production date

OHYK064001

OHYK064002

■ Type A

■Example

■ Type B

❈The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For

more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

What to do in an emergency

186

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary

fix to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized Kia deal-

er as soon as possible.

When two or more tires are flat, do

not use the tire mobility kit because

the supported one sealant of Tire

Mobility Kit is only used for one flat

tire.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The system of compressor and seal-

ing compound effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails

or similar objects and reinflates the

tire.

After you ensured that the tire is

properly sealed you can drive cau-

tiously on the tire (distance up to 200

km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of

(80 km/h) in order to reach a service

station or tire dealer for the tire

replacement.

OPS063008

OAM060013L

WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls. This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

619

What to do in an emergency

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the suggested use of

the Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tires. Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the tire

can be sealed using the tire mobil-

ity kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).

Please contact the nearest Kia

dealership if the tire cannot be

made roadworthy with the Tire

Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 min. at a time

or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below -

-30°C (22°F).

What to do in an emergency

206

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. On/off switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-

tion pressure

9. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and

wheel

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified

sequence, otherwise the sealant

may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OAM060015L

WARNING - Expired

sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

621

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label

(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and

place it in a highly visible place

inside the vehicle such as on the

steering wheel to remind the driv-

er not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto

the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is

closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw filling hose (2) of the sealant

bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing (4) of the compressor so

that the bottle is upright.

6. Ensure that the compressor is

switched off, position 0. 7.Plug the compressor power cord

into the front passenger side power

outlet of the vehicle.

OPS063008 OPS043204

WARNING

Only use the front passenger

side power outlet when con-

necting the power cord.

What to do in an emergency

226

8. With the engine start/stop button

position on or ignition switch posi-

tion on, switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately 5~7

minutes to fill the sealant up to

proper pressure. (refer to the Tire

and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-

tion pressure of the tire after filling

is unimportant and will be

checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire

and stay away from the tire when

filling it.

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

7~10km (4~6miles or, about

10min) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h

(50 mph). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).

While driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,

the tire pressure sensors and wheel

may be stained by sealant.

Therefore, remove the tire pressure

sensors and wheel stained by

sealant and have it serviced by an

authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Carbon

monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

WARNING - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 200kpa (29 PSI). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

623

What to do in an emergency

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1.After driving approximately

7~10km (4~6miles or about

10min), stop at a safety location.

2.Connect connection hose (9) of the

compressor directly to the tire

valve.

3.Plug the compressor power cord

into the vehicle power outlet.

4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compressor,

position I. To check the current

inflation pressure setting, briefly

switch off the compressor.

✽✽NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show high-

er than actual reading when the

compressor is running. To get an

accurate tire pressure, the compres-

sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure: Loosen the screw cap (8)

on the compressor hose.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not

approved by Kia, the tire pres-

sure sensors may be damaged

by sealant. The sealant on the

tire pressure sensor and wheel

should be removed when you

replace the tire with a new one

and inspect the tire pressure

sensors in authorized dealer.

What to do in an emergency

246

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)

Max. working pressure:

6 bar (87 psi)

Size

Compressor: 170 x 150 x 60 mm

(6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.)

Sealant bottle: 85 x 70 ø mm

(3.3 x 2.8 ø in.)

Compressor weight:

0.8 kg (1.77 lbs)

Sealant volume:

200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)

625

What to do in an emergency

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary,

we recommend having it done by an

authorized Kia dealer or a commer-

cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting

and towing procedures are neces-

sary to prevent damage to the vehi-

cle. The use of wheel dollies or

flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines informa-

tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in chap-

ter 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle

with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels

off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or sus-

pension components are damaged

or the vehicle is being towed with the

front wheels on the ground, use a

towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

OXM069028

dolly

WARNING

- Side and curtaion AB

If your vehicle is equipped with

side and curtain air bag, set the

ignition switch to LOCK or ACC

position when the vehicle is

being towed.

The side and curtain air bag

may deploy when the ignitions

is ON, and the rollover sensor

detects the situation as a

rollover.

What to do in an emergency

266

When towing your vehicle in an

emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (front)

(if equipped)

1.Remove the towing hook from the

tool case.

2.Remove the hole cover pressing

the lower part of the cover on the

front bumper.

CAUTION - Towing gear

position

Failure to place the transaxle

shift lever in N (Neutral) may

cause internal damage to the

transaxle.

CAUTION - Towing

• Do not tow the vehicle back-

wards with the front wheels on

the ground as this may cause

damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use wheel lift or

flatbed equipment.

OUN046030

OCM054034

OPS063009

627

What to do in an emergency

3.Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is

fully secured.

4.Remove the towing hook and

install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you to have it done by an

authorized Kia dealer or a com-

mercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or

chain secured to the emergency tow-

ing hook under the front (or rear) of

the vehicle. Use extreme caution

when towing the vehicle. A driver

must be in the vehicle to steer it and

operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done

only on hard-surfaced roads for a

short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or other

conditions from which the vehicle

cannot be driven out under its own

power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than

the vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

OPS063010 OPS063010

OPS063012

Front

Rear (if equipped)

What to do in an emergency

286

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle other

than the tow hooks for towing may

damage the body of your vehicle.

• Only use a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the cable

or chain to the towing hook provid-

ed.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it

steadily and with even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do

not pull from the side or at a verti-

cal angle. Always pull straight

ahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m

(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red

cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)

wide) in the middle of the strap for

easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing

strap is not loose during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so

the steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more

force than usual since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be

required because the power steer-

ing system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill,

the brakes may overheat and brake

performance will be reduced. Stop

often and let the brakes cool off.

• If the car is being towed with all

four wheels on the ground, it can

be towed only from the front. Be

sure that the transaxle is in neutral.

Be sure the steering is unlocked by

placing the ignition switch in the

ACC position. A driver must be in

the towed vehicle to operate the

steering and brakes.

OPA067014

629

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION - Automatic

transaxle

• To avoid serious damage to

the automatic transaxle, limit

the vehicle speed to 15 km/h

(10 mph) and drive less than

1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.

• Before towing, check the auto-

matic transaxle for fluid leaks

under your vehicle. If the auto-

matic transaxle fluid is leak-

ing, a flatbed equipment or

towing dolly must be used.

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

• Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47

• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

• Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81

• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-82

• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-84

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85

• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OPS073001

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Radiator cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Negative battery terminal

9. Fuse box

10. Air cleaner

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■1.6L GDI

Maintenance

OPS073002

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Positive battery terminal

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

* : if equipped

■■2.0L GDI

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

Should you have any doubts con-

cerning the inspection or servicing of

your vehicle, we strongly recom-

mend that you have an authorized

Kia dealer perform this work.

An authorized Kia dealer has factory

trained technicians and genuine Kia

parts to service your vehicle proper-

ly. For expert advice and quality serv-

ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-

cient servicing may result in opera-

tional problems with your vehicle that

could lead to vehicle damage, an

accident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsi-

bility.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance service charts shown on the

following pages. You need this infor-

mation to establish your compliance

with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle war-

ranties.

Detailed warranty information is pro-

vided in your Warranty & Consumer

Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or

a lack of required maintenance are

not covered.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by an

authorized Kia dealer. An authorized

Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service

quality standards and receives tech-

nical support from Kia in order to pro-

vide you with a high level of service

satisfaction.

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precau-

tions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section,

several procedures can be done only

by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-

cial tools.

✽✽NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance dur-

ing the warranty period may affect

warranty coverage. For details, read

the separate Warranty & Consumer

Information manual provided with

the vehicle. If you're unsure about

any servicing or maintenance proce-

dure, have it done by an authorized

Kia dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance

work

Do not wear jewelry or loose

clothing while working under

the hood of your vehicle with

the engine running. These can

become entangled in moving

parts, if you must run the engine

while working under the hood,

make certain that you remove

all jewelry (especially rings,

bracelets, watches, and neck-

laces) and all neckties, scarves,

and similar loose clothing

before getting near the engine

or cooling fans.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed by the owner or an author-

ized Kia dealer at the frequencies

indicated to help ensure safe,

dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your deal-

er as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks

are generally not covered by war-

ranties and you may be charged for

labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the

coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

Check if the front of the radiator

and condenser are clean and not

blocked with leaves, dirt or insects

etc. If any of the above parts are

extremely dirty or you are not sure

of their condition, take your vehicle

to an authorized Kia dealer.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of

exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steer-

ing effort or looseness in the steer-

ing wheel, or change in its straight-

ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or “pulls” to one side

when traveling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transaxle occurs,

check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P

(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot

coolant and steam may blow

out under pressure. This could

cause burns or other serious

injury.

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn

signals and hazard warning flash-

ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air

conditioning hoses for leaks or

damage.

• Check the windshield washer

spray and wiper operation. Clean

the wiper blades with clean cloth

dampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain

holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and

checks, and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks

and latches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate the automat-

ic transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually

operated where none of the following

conditions apply. If any of the follow-

ing conditions apply, follow the

Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme-

ly humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy

city traffic during hot weather

above 32°C (90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should

inspect, replace or refill more fre-

quently than the following Normal

Maintenance Schedule. After 120

months or 240,000 km (150,000

miles) continue to follow the pre-

scribed maintenance intervals.

Maintenance

107

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep

receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-

quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or

timing belt.

*2Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be

maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom-

mended for this maintenance schedule depends on

fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters

like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard

starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately

regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized Kia dealer for details.

*3Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibra-

tion and adjust if necessary.

*4The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur

or tension is reduced excessively.

*5When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant

additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in

the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant

mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine

damage.

*6If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one

bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-

able from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-

mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

711

Maintenance

12,000 km or 6 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-

ant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect visually the following items.

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

24,000 km or 12 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-

ant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

(Continued)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

713

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

48,000 km or 24 months

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

(Continued)

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

147

(Continued)

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

72,000 km or 36 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

715

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

96,000 km or 48 months

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First, 96,000 km or 72 months

after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

167

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

120,000 km or 60 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

717

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

144,000 km or 72 months

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) *3

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

(Continued)

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

187

(Continued)

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated),

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

168,000 km or 84 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

(Continued)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

719

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

192,000 km or 96 months

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

(Continued)

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine coolant*5

(First, 192,000 km or 120 months

after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

207

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

216,000 km or 108 months

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

721

Maintenance

240,000 km or 120 months

❑Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-

erant and performance (if equipped)

❑Inspect cooling system *1

❑Inspect drive belt *4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after

every 24,000 km or 24 months)

❑Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑Replace engine coolant *5

(First 192,000 km or 120 months

after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

❑Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

227

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer

to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 months

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 months

EVERY 120,000 km

EVERY 90,000 km

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K

C, E

A, B, H, I, K

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, G, H

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER

ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS DRIVING

CONDITION

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 8 km in normal tem-

perature or less than 16 km in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread

roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)

G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 170 km/h

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

723

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the

vehicle is being driven in severe con-

ditions, more frequent oil and filter

changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil

saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked peri-

odically for proper tension and

adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven,

damage the emission system and

cause multiple issues such as hard

starting. If an excessive amount of

foreign matter accumulates in the

fuel tank, the filter may require

replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the

engine for several minutes, and

check for leaks at the connections.

Fuel filters should be installed by an

authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. Have an authorized Kia dealer

replace any damaged or leaking

parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure that a new

vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-

rectly replaced.

Maintenance

247

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-

dence of heat and/or mechanical

damage. Hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and

excessive swelling indicate deterio-

ration. Particular attention should be

paid to examine those hose surfaces

nearest to high heat sources, such

as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure

that the hoses do not come in con-

tact with any heat source, sharp

edges or moving components which

might cause heat damage or

mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and

couplings, to make sure they are

secure, and that no leaks are pres-

ent. Hoses should be replaced

immediately if there is any evidence

of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is

recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise

and/or engine vibration and adjust if

necessary. An authorized Kia dealer

should perform the operation.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system compo-

nents, such as the radiator, coolant

reservoir, hoses and connections for

leakage and damage. Replace any

damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not

be checked under normal usage

conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid

should be changed at an authorized

Kia dealer in accordance to the

scheduled maintenance at the begin-

ning of this section.

725

Maintenance

✽✽NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is

basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the auto-

matic transaxle fluid will begin to

look darker.

It is the normal condition and you

should not judge the need to replace

the fluid based upon the changed

color.

Manual transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid

according to the maintenance sched-

ule.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and

any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-

ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the

brake fluid reservoir.The level should

be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks

on the side of the reservoir. Use only

hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system

including the parking brake lever (or

pedal) and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers

and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear,

discs for run out and wear, and

calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking

the pads or lining wear limit, we rec-

ommend you to refer to the Kia web-

site.

(http://www.kiatechinfo.com)

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,

muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-

rioration, or damage. Start the

engine and listen carefully for any

exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as neces-

sary.

CAUTION -Transaxle flu-

ids

The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle mal-

function and failure.

Maintenance

267

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine

off, check for excessive free-play in

the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or dam-

age. Check the dust boots and ball

joints for deterioration, cracks, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and dam-

age.

727

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to

reach normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a

few minutes (about 5 minutes) for

the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,

and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be between F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to

bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil

from being spilled on engine com-

ponents.

WARNING - Radiator

hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may

be hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION - Replacing

engin oil

• Do not overfill the engine oil. It

may damage the engine.

• Do not spill engine oil, when

adding or changing engine

oil. If you drop the engine oil

on the engine room, wipe it off

immediately.

OAM072001

OPS073003

■Type A

■Type B

OAM072003

OPS073004

■Type A

■Type B

Maintenance

287

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants

and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Changing the engine oil and

filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by

an authorized Kia dealer according

to the Maintenance Schedule at the

beginning of this chapter.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irri-

tation or cancer of the skin if

left in contact with the skin for

prolonged periods of time.

Always protect your skin by

washing your hands thoroughly

with soap and warm water as

soon as possible after handling

used oil.

729

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season,

and before traveling to a colder cli-

mate.

Checking the coolant level Turn the engine off and wait until it

cools down. Use extreme care when

removing the radiator cap. Wrap a

thick towel around it, and turn it

counterclockwise slowly to the first

stop. Step back while the pressure is

released from the cooling system.

When you are sure all the pressure

has been released, press down on

the cap, using a thick towel, and con-

tinue turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

WARNING

Removing radiator

cap

Never attempt to remove the

radiator cap while the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so

might lead to cooling system

and engine damage and could

result in serious personal injury

from escaping hot coolant or

steam.

Maintenance

307

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and

heater hoses. Replace any swollen

or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side

of the coolant reservoir when the

engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protec-

tion against freezing and corrosion.

Bring the level to F, but do not over-

fill. If frequent additions are required,

see an authorized Kia dealer for a

cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only

deionized water or soft water for

your vehicle and never mix hard

water in the coolant filled at the fac-

tory. An improper coolant mixture

can result in serious malfunction or

engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be

protected by an ethylene-glycol-

based coolant to prevent corrosion

and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the spec-

ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

OXM079006

WARNING -Cooling fan

Use caution when

working near the

blade of the cooling

fan. The electric

motor (cooling fan) is

controlled by engine coolant

temperature, refrigerant pres-

sure and vehicle speed. it may

sometimes operate even when

the engine is not running.

731

Maintenance

For mixture percentage, refer to the

following table. Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an

authorized Kia dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the

beginning of this chapter.

Put a thick cloth around the radiator

cap before refilling the coolant in

order to prevent the coolant from

overflowing into engine parts such as

the alternator.

OPS073005

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

-15°C (5°F)

35 65

-25°C (-13°F)

40 60

-35°C (-31°F)

50 50

-45°C (-49°F)

60 40

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator

are hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure which may result in

serious injury.

Maintenance

327

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch*

fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean

the area around the reservoir cap

thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*

fluid contamination.

* if equipped

If the level is low, add fluid to the

MAX level. The level will fall with

accumulated mileage. This is a nor-

mal condition associated with the

wear of the brake linings and/or

clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid

level is excessively low, have the

brake/clutch* system checked by an

authorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch*

fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-

cants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

In the event the brake/clutch* system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

the vehicle should be inspected by

an authorized Kia dealer.

When changing and adding

brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.

Do not let it come in contact with

your eyes. If brake/ clutch* fluid

should come in contact with your

eyes, immediately flush them with a

large quantity of fresh tap water.

Have your eyes examined by a doc-

tor as soon as possible.

OXM079008

CAUTION - Proper fluid

Only use brake fluid in brake

system. Small amounts of

improper fluids (such as engine

oil) can cause damage to the

brake system.

733

Maintenance

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an extended

time should never be used as its

quality cannot be guaranteed. It

should be disposed of properly.

CAUTION - Brake/clutch*

fluid

Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid

to contact the vehicle's body

paint, as paint damage will

result.

Maintenance

347

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid

level

The reservoir is translucent so that

you can check the level with a quick

visual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

OPS073006

OPS073007

■Type A

■Type B

WARNING -Flammable

Fluid

Do not allow the washer fluid to

come in contact with open

flames or sparks. The wind-

shield washer fluid reservoir is

flammable under certain cir-

cumstances.This can result in a

fire.

735

Maintenance

PARKING BRAKE

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking

brake by counting the number of

“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it

from the released position. Also, the

parking brake alone should securely

hold the vehicle on a fairly steep

grade. If the stroke is more or less

than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an authorized Kia

dealer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of

20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

OPS053011

Maintenance

367

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary,

and should not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspect-

ing the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed

air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover

attaching clips and open the cover. 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

AIR CLEANER

OAM079043

OAM079044 OAM079046

737

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extreme-

ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the

element more often than the usual

recommended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage

conditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION

- Air filter maintenance

• Do not drive with the air clean-

er removed; this will result in

excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner

filter, be careful that dust or

dirt does not enter the air

intake, or damage may result.

• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of

non-genuine parts could dam-

age the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

387

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should

be replaced according to the mainte-

nance schedule. If the vehicle is

operated in severely air-polluted

cities or on dusty rough roads for a

long period, it should be inspected

more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control

air filter, replace it performing the fol-

lowing procedure, and be careful to

avoid damaging other components. 1. Open the glove box. 2. With the glove box open, remove

the Air filter cover.

OPS073009OPS073008

739

Maintenance

3. Remove the climate control air fil-

ter case by pulling out both sides

of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

When replacing the climate control

air filter install it properly. Otherwise,

the system may produce noise and

the effectiveness of the filter may be

reduced.

OPS073010 OPS073011

Maintenance

407

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

Commercial hot waxes applied by

automatic vehicle washes have been

known to make the windshield diffi-

cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-

shield or the wiper blades with for-

eign matter can reduce the effective-

ness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination

are insects, tree sap, and hot wax

treatments used by some commer-

cial vehicle washes. If the blades are

not wiping properly, clean both the

window and the blades with a good

cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse

thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean

adequately, the blades may be worn

or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms

or other components, do not attempt

to move the wipers manually.

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper blades

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

741

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the

wiper blade assembly to expose

the plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the

blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

1LDA5023

CAUTION -Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to

fall against the windshield,

since it may chip or crack the

windshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OHM078059

CAUTION -Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to

fall against the windshield,

since it may chip or crack the

windshield.

Maintenance

427

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then

pull down the blade assembly and

remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in

the reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out

the wiper blade assembly.

OHM078060

OHM078062

OHM078061

743

Maintenance

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the

slot in the wiper arm until it clicks

into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it

slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms

or other components, have an

authorized Kia dealer replace the

wiper blade.

OHM078063

Maintenance

447

BATTERY

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from

the battery immediately with a

solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be

used for an extended time, discon-

nect the battery cables.

Never attempt to recharge the bat-

tery when the battery cables are con-

nected.

WARNING - Risk of

explosion

Keep lighted cigarettes

and all other flames or

sparks away from the

battery.

The battery contains

hydrogen -- a highly

combustible gas which

will explode if it comes

in contact with a flame or

spark.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children

because batteries con-

tain highly corrosive

SULFURIC ACID. Do not

allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

Wear eye protection

when charging or work-

ing near a battery.

Always provide ventila-

tion when working in an

enclosed space.

OXM079100

745

Maintenance

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel

pain or burning sensation,

get medical attention imme-

diately.

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulation.

✽✽NOTICE

If you connect unauthorized elec-

tronic devices to the battery, the bat-

tery may be discharged. Never use

unauthorized devices.

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-

ple, the headlights or interior lights

were left on while the vehicle was

not in use), recharge it by slow

charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while

the vehicle is being used, recharge

it at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING

- Risk of electrocution

Never touch the electrical igni-

tion system while the vehicle is

running. This system works

with high voltage which can

"zap" you.

Maintenance

467

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from

the vehicle and placed in an area

with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or

flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charging,

and stop or reduce the charging

rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if the

temperature of the electrolyte of

any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

• Before performing maintenance or

recharging the battery, turn off all

accessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must be

removed first and installed last

when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the bat-

tery has been discharged or the bat-

tery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 4)

• Sunroof (See chapter 4)

• Trip computer (See chapter 4)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)

• Clock (See chapter 4)

• Audio (See chapter 4)

747

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, vehicle

handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side center

pillar. • Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling and

reduced fuel economy. Wheel

deformation also is possible. Keep

your tire pressures at the proper

levels. If a tire frequently needs

refilling, have it checked by an

authorized Kia dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the center

of the tire tread, and a greater pos-

sibility of damage from road haz-

ards.

OXM079101L

WARNING - Tire under

inflation

Inflate your tire consistent with

the instructions provided in this

manual. Severe under inflation

can lead to severe heat build-

up, causing blowouts, tread

separation and other tire fail-

ures that can result in the loss

of vehicle control. This risk is

much higher on hot days and

when driving for long periods at

high speeds.

Maintenance

487

• Warm tires normally exceed rec-

ommended cold tire pressures by

28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not

release air from warm tires to

adjust the pressure or the tires will

be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation

valve caps. Without the valve cap,

dirt or moisture could get into the

valve core and cause air leakage. If

a valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires

are cold. (After vehicle has been

parked for at least three hours or

hasn't been driven more than 1.6

km (one mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare

tire each time you check the pres-

sure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle. Be

careful not to overload a vehicle

luggage rack if your vehicle is

equipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pres-

sure

Check your tires once a month or

more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check

tire pressure. You cannot tell if your

tires are properly inflated simply by

looking at them. Radial tires may

look properly inflated even when

they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure

when the tires are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

749

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading

information label, no further adjust-

ment is necessary. If the pressure is

low, add air until you reach the rec-

ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

• Inspect your tires frequently for

proper inflation as well as wear and

damage. Always use a tire pres-

sure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly causing

poor handling, loss of vehicle con-

trol, and sudden tire failure leading

to accidents, injuries, and even

death. The recommended cold tire

pressure for your vehicle can be

found in this manual and on the tire

label located on the driver's side

center pillar.

• Remember to check the pressure

of your spare tire. Kia recommends

that you check the spare every

time you check the pressure of the

other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tires be rotated

every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

Maintenance

507

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to left.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

(if equipped) for tire rotation.

Wheel alignment and tire bal-

ance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

CAUTION -Wheel weight

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

WARNING - Mixing tires

Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances.This may cause unusu-

al handling characteristics.

751

Maintenance

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

The ABS works by comparing the

speed of the wheels. The tire size

affects wheel speed. When replacing

tires, all 4 tires must use the same

size originally supplied with the vehi-

cle. Using tires of a different size can

cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) and ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) to work irregularly.

✽✽NOTICE

We recommend that when replacing

tires, use the same originally sup-

plied with the vehicles. If not, that

affects driving performance.

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

Maintenance

527

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

A wheel that is not the correct size

may adversely affect wheel and

bearing life, braking and stopping

abilities, handling characteristics,

ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-

ance, snow chain clearance,

speedometer and odometer calibra-

tion, headlight aim and bumper

height.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. Slow down whenever there

is rain, snow or ice on the road to

reduce the possibility of losing con-

trol of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

CAUTION - Wheels

Wheels that do not meet Kia’s

specifications may fit poorly

and result in damage to the

vehicle or unusual handling and

poor vehicle control.

753

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-

lowing explains what the letters and

numbers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P235/65R17 108T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

vehicles or light trucks; however,

not all tires have this marking).

235 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

108 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

Maintenance

547

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger vehicle tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire. This symbol corresponds to that

tire's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2015.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

Z 240 km/h (Above 149 mph)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

WARNING - Tire age

Replace tires within the recom-

mended time frame. Failure to

replace tires as recommended

can result in sudden tire failure,

which could lead to a loss of

control and an accident.

755

Maintenance

4.Tire ply composition and mate-

rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tires degrade over time, even when

they are not being used. Regardless

of the remaining tread, we recom-

mend that tires be replaced after

approximately

six (6) years of normal service. Heat

caused by hot climates or frequent

high loading conditions can acceler-

ate the aging process.

Maintenance

567

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning, or peak traction char-

acteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perform-

ance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

757

Maintenance

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air

inside the tire pressing outward on

the tire. Air pressure is expressed in

kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per

square inch (psi).

Accessory Weight: This means the

combined weight of optional acces-

sories. Some examples of optional

accessories are, automatic

transaxle, power seats, and air con-

ditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a

tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords

that is located between the plies and

the tread. Cords may be made from

steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel

wires wrapped by steel cords that

hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the plies are laid at alternate

angles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured in

pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-

pascals (kPa) before a tire has built

up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight

of a motor vehicle with standard and

optional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, but without passengers and

cargo.

DOT Markings: The DOT code

includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-

ignator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant,

brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The

side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number

ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-

sponds to the load carrying capacity

of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which a

cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-

mum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load

rating for a tire at the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure for that

tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The

number of occupants a vehicle is

designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg

(150 pounds).

Maintenance

587

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side

of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward when

mounted on a vehicle. The outward

facing sidewall bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire

used on passenger cars and some

light duty trucks and multipurpose

vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure and shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and

upon which the tire beads are seat-

ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating the

maximum speed at which a tire can

operate.

Traction: The friction between the

tire and the road surface. The

amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that

comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow

bands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of a

tire when only 2/32 inch of tread

remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information

system that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-

ber of designated seating positions

multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the

rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due to

curb and accessory weight plus

maximum occupant and cargo

weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-

ly attached to a vehicle showing the

original equipment tire size and rec-

ommended inflation pressure.

759

Maintenance

All season tires

Kia specifies all season tires on

some models to provide good per-

formance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

Kia specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior perform-

ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-

formance is substantially reduced in

snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M+S

(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.

if you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-

mends the use of snow tires or all

season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your vehicle with snow

tires, they should be the same size

and have the same load capacity as

the original tires. Snow tires should

be installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4

psi) more air pressure than the pres-

sure recommended for the standard

tires on the tire label on the driver's

side of the center pillar, or up to the

maximum pressure shown on the tire

sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75

mph) when your vehicle is equipped

with snow tires.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-

low is: Identical radial-ply tires should

always be used as a set of four.

Maintenance

607

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval shown in this section

to achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided

for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires

are optimized for handling and brak-

ing, it may be more uncomfortable to

ride in and there is more noise com-

pare with normal tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tire of

the low aspect ratio tire is easi-

er to be damaged. So, follow the

instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

- If the tire is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the

tire condition or contact an

authorized Kia dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire,

inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 3,000km.

761

Maintenance

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own

eyes. But if there is the slight-

est hint of tire damage, even

though you cannot see the tire

damage with your own eyes,

have the tire checked or

replaced because the tire

damage may cause air leak-

age from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-

mation on the tire sidewall.

Maintenance

627

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,

one located in the driver’s side panel

bolster, the other in the engine com-

partment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will melt.

If the electrical system does not

work, first check the driver’s side

fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with

one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this

indicates an electrical problem. Avoid

using the system involved and imme-

diately consult an authorized Kia

dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: micro

mini type for lower amperage rating,

cartridge type, and multi fuse for

higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse

replacement

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire or alu-

minum foil instead of the

proper fuse - even as a tem-

porary repair. It may cause

extensive wiring damage and

a possible fire.

• Replace the fuse with the igni-

tion “OFF”, switch off of all

electrical devices and then

separation (-) terminal from

the battery in a safe place.

• Do not arbitrarily modify or

add-on electric wiring of the

vehicle.

OLM079051N

Normal

■Blade type

■Cartridge type

■Multi fuse

Blown

Normal Blown

763

Maintenance

✽✽NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label

may differ from equipped items.

Inner panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

OPS073014

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove

fuses because it may cause a

short circuit and damage the

system.

WARNING - Fuse fire

• When replacing a blown fuse

or relay with a new one, make

sure the new fuse or relay fits

tightly into the clips The

incomplete fastening fuse or

relay may cause the vehicle

wiring and electric systems

damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays

and terminals fastened with

bolts or nuts. The fuses,

relays and terminals may be

fastened incompletely, and it

may cause a possible fire. If

fuses, relays and terminals

fastened with bolts or nuts are

blown, we recommend that

you consult with an author-

ized Kia dealer.

• Do not plug in screwdrivers or

aftermarket wiring into the ter-

minal originally designed for

fuse and relays only.The elec-

trical system and wiring of the

vehicle interior may be dam-

aged or burned due to contact

failure.

Maintenance

647

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the fuse puller provided

on the engine compartment fuse

panel cover.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it

if it is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a

fuse of the same rating from a circuit

you may not need for operating the

vehicle, such as the power outlet

fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work and the

fuses are OK, check the fuse panel

in the engine compartment. If a fuse

is blown, it must be replaced.

Fuse switch

Always, put the fuse switch at the ON

position.

If you move the switch to the OFF

position, some items such as audio

and digital clock must be reset and

transmitter (or smart key) may not

work properly.

OPS073015

OPS073017

765

Maintenance

✽✽NOTICE

If you need to park your vehicle for

prolonged periods more than 1

month, move the transportation fuse

switch to the OFF position to pre-

vent the battery being discharged.

Engine compartment fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling the

cover up. When the blade type

fuse is disconnected, remove it by

using the clip designed for chang-

ing fuses located in the engine

room fuse box. Upon removal,

securely insert reserve fuse of

equal quantity.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it

if it is blown. To remove or insert

the fuse, use the fuse puller in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized Kia dealer.

OPS073016

CAUTION - Fuse panel

covers

After checking the fuse panel in

the engine compartment,

securely install the fuse panel

cover with using cover locking

sound. If not, electrical failures

may occur from water contact.

Maintenance

667

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

5. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an

authorized Kia dealer.

OPS073039

767

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,

you can find the fuse/relay label

describing fuse/relay name and

capacity.

✽✽NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in

this manual may be applicable to

your vehicle. It is accurate at the

time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer

to the fuse panel label.

OPS073014

OPS073018

Maintenance

687

Inner fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

POWER OUTLET 2 20A P_OUTLET

ACC 10A O_S_MIRR_SW, AMP, AUDIO/UVO/AVN 4.0_HEAD UNIT, BCM, TMU, MOOD_LAMP_UNIT,

SMK_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W), LDC_AMP(200W)

POWER OUTLET 1 25A C/LIGHT, REAR_P_OUTLET

DRL 10A BCM(DAY_RUNNNIG_LIGHT_LAMP_POWER)

MODULE 6 7.5A SUNROOF_MOTOR, LUGGAGE_PORTABLE_LAMP(CHARGE_POWER), SEAT_EXTN_DRV(HEAT-

ED), REAR_SEAT(IGN2)

WIPER FRT 2 25A FRONT_WIPER_MOTOR(POWER), FRONT_WIPER_RLY(LOW)

WIPER RR 15A REAR_WIPER_MOTOR, MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), REAR_WIPER_RLY,

REAR_WIPER_RLY_COIL,

AMP 30A AMP, LDC_AMP(400W)

MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, SMK_UNIT

WIPER FRT 1 10A MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), BCM(WASHER_MOTOR_POWER),

HTD STRG 15A STEERING_HEATED

A/CON 1 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), IONIZER, PTC_RLY_COIL, BLOWER_RLY_COIL

HTD MIRR 10A OUTSIDE_MIRROR(HEATED), ECU(ELEC. LOAD DEFROST),

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL/AUTO(HEATED_SIGNAL)

769

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

T/GATE OPEN 15A T/GATE_OPEN_RLY(T/GATE_LATCH_MOTOR), T/GATE_OPEN_RLY_COIL

S/HEATER FRT 20A FRONT_SEAT_EXTN(HEATED_POWER)

DR LOCK 20A DOOR_LOCK_RLY, DOOR_LOCK_RLY_COIL, DOOR_UNLOCK_RLY_COIL, DEAD_LOCK_RLY,

DEAD_LOCK_RLY_COIL

A/BAG IND 7.5A CLUSTER

A/BAG 15A ACU, WCS_ECU

MODULE 4 10A I_S_MIRR_ECM, AUTO_HLLD_ECU

STOP LAMP 15A HAZARD_SW(ESS_INDICATOR_POWER), STOP_SIGNAL_ELECTRONIC_MODULE

MODULE 7 10A SPORTS_MODE_SW(ATM_SHIFT_LOCK_SOLENOID), KEY_LOCK_SOLENOID

S/HEATER RR 20A REAR_SEAT(HEATED_POWER)

P/WDW RH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

P/WDW LH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

MODULE 1 10A BCM, SEAT_EXTN_DRV

BRAKE SWITCH 1 10A ABS/ESP_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W)

MODULE 2 10A

LOWER_SW, CENTER_SW, TPMS_UNIT, REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARK-

ING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_UNIT,

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), LANE_DEPARTURE_WARNING_SYSTEM_UNIT,

STOP_LP_SW, WATER_FUEL_SNSR

Maintenance

707

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MODULE 3 10A SHIFT_LEVER_MODULE, REAR_SEAT_WARMER_SW, REAR_SEAT_WARMER, DIAGNOSIS, AVN

4.0_HEAD_UNIT, LDC_AMP(200W), TMU, HLLD_SW, HLLD_ACTR, OIL_LEVEL_SNSR,

ECU 7.5A ENGINE_CONTROL_UNIT, AIR_FLOW_SNSR, START_RLY_COIL, SMK_UNIT, SMATRA_IMMOBI-

LIZATION

I.O.D 2 15A LDC_AMP(200W), AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT, TMU

I.O.D 3 7.5A OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY_COIL, OUTSIDE_MIR-

ROR_UNFOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY_COIL

CLUSTER 10A CLUSTER

TCU 15A SPEED_SNSR (MT), BACK_UP_LAMP_SW, OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, INHIBITOR,

TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

I.O.D 4 7.5A OBDII(POWER), TPMS_UNIT(POWER), CLUSTER, AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), BCM,

REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_BUZZER

SPARE 10A -

SUNROOF 2 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

P/SEAT DRV 30A FRNT_SEAT_EXTN(POWER)

SUNROOF 1 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

MDPS 7.5A MDPS_UNIT

A/CON 2 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL(MAX_BLOWER), AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_AUTO(BLOWER_MOTOR)

START 7.5A E/R_FUSE & RELAY_BOX(RELAY - START / SUB START), PDM

771

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

I.O.D 1 7.5A GLOVE_BOX_LAMP, DOOR_WARNING_SW, OVER_HEAD_CONSOLE_LAMP, PERSONAL_LAMP,

SUNVISOR_LAMP, LUGGAGE_LAMP, PORTABLE_LAMP(DOOR)

PDM 2 7.5A SMK_UNIT(BATT_CPU), SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION(BATT)

PDM 1 20A SMK_UNIT(POWER)

BRAKE SWITCH 2 10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_OPEN), SMK_UNIT

Maintenance

727

Engine compartment fuse panel

OPS073013

OPS073019

773

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

IG1 40A IGN_SW(B1), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG1), BUTTON_START_RLY(ACC)

BLOWER 40A BLOWER_RLY, BLOWER_MOTOR

RR HTD 40A REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY,

ECU 2 30A MAIN_RLY, MAIN_RLY_COIL

ECU 3 15A ECU(AFTER_AIN_RELAY)

IGN COIL 20A IGNITION_COIL(POWER)

ECU 1 20A ECU(AFTER_MAIN_RELAY)

SENSOR 1 10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_CLOSE), O2_SNSR, PURGE_CONTROL_SOLENOID_VALVE, OCV,

SENSOR 2 10A CMP, COOLING_FAN_LOW_RLY_COIL

INJECTOR 10A -

B/UP LAMP 10A RR_COMBI_LAMP(BACK_UP_LAMP)

WIPER 10A ECU(WIPER_SWITCH)

F/PUMP 15A FUEL_PUMP_MOTOR

HORN 15A HORN_RLY, HORN_RLY_COIL, HORN

H/LAMP WASHER 20A HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY_COIL, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_MOTOR

Maintenance

747

Description Fuse rating Protected component

B+ 1 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+1)

B+ 2 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+2)

B+ 3 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+3)

IG2 40A IGN_SW(IG2), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG2), START_RLY

MDPS 80A MDPS_UNIT

ALT 125A ALTERNATOR

TCU 20A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

DEICER 20A DEICER

ECU 4 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

ECU 5 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

A/CON 10A A/CON_RLY

C/FAN 40A COOLING_FAN_MOTOR, SUB_FUEL_PUMP, SUB_FUEL_VALVE

INVERTER 50A OIL_PUMP_INVERTER

ABS 1 40A ABS/ESP_UNIT(MOTOR)

ABS 2 30A ABS/ESP_UNIT(SOLENOID)

775

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specified

wattage.

• If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expertise,

consult an authorized Kia dealer. In

many cases, it is difficult to replace

vehicle light bulbs because other

parts of the vehicle must be

removed before you can get to the

bulb. This is especially true if you

have to remove the headlight

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

• Do not install additional bulb or

LED. If you install that, the lamp

may not be operated properly and

fuse box or electric wiring system

may have problem.

Headlight, position light, turn

signal light, side marker light

and front fog light bulb

replacement

WARNING - Lights

Prior to working on the light,

firmly apply the parking brake,

ensure that the ignition switch

is turned to the LOCK position

and turn off the lights to avoid

sudden movement of the vehi-

cle and burning your fingers or

receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

- Light replacement

Be sure to replace the burned-

out bulb with one of the same

wattage rating. Otherwise, it

may cause damage to the fuse

or electric wiring system.

OPS073020

■Type A

OPS073021

■Type B

Maintenance

767

(1) Headlight (High)

(2) Headlight (Low)

(3) Front side marker light

(4) Front turn signal

(5) Front position light

(6) Front fog light (if equipped)

If the headlight aiming adjustment is

necessary after the headlight

assembly is reinstalled, consult an

authorized Kia dealer.

• Always handle them carefully, and

avoid scratches and abrasions. If

the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with

liquids. Never touch the glass with

bare hands. Residual oil may

cause the bulb to overheat and

burst when lit. A bulb should be

operated only when installed in a

headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

OHD076046

WARNING - Halogen

bulbs

Handle halogen bulbs with care.

• Halogen bulbs contain pres-

surized gas that will produce

flying pieces of glass if bro-

ken.

777

Maintenance

Headlight (HID type)

If the light bulb is not operating, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

HID lamps have superior perform-

ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps

are estimated by the manufacturer

to last twice as long or longer than

halogen bulbs depending on their

frequency of use. They will probably

require replacement at some point

in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the

headlamps on and off more than

typical use will shorten HID lamps

life. HID lamps do not fail in the

same manner as halogen incandes-

cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out

after a period of operation but will

immediately relight when the head-

lamp switch is cycled it is likely the

HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID

lighting components are more com-

plex than conventional halogen

bulbs thus have higher replacement

cost. 1. Turn off the engine and open the

hood. Disconnect the negative

battery cable.

2. Disconnect the power connector

from the back of the headlight

assembly.

3. Loosen the retaining bolts.

WARNING - HID

Headlight low beam

(if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace or

inspect the low beam (XENON

bulb) due to electric shock dan-

ger. If the low beam (XENON

bulb) is not working, have your

vehicle checked by an author-

ized Kia dealer.

OPS073051

OPS073028

Maintenance

787

4.Pull out the end of the front

bumper.

5.Remove the headlight assembly

from the body of the vehicle.

If you can reach the bulb without

removing the headlight assembly,

you do not need to do step 3,4 and 5.

Headlight bulb (High)

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre-

vious page.

6.Remove the headlight bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.

7.Disconnect the headlight bulb

socket-connector.

8.Unsnap the headlight bulb retain-

ing wire by depressing the end and

pushing it upward.

9.Remove the bulb from the head-

light assembly.

10. Install a new headlight bulb and

snap the headlight bulb retaining

wire into position by aligning the

wire with the groove on the bulb.

11. Connect the headlight bulb sock-

et connector.

12. Install the headlight bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

13. Connect the power connector to

the back of the headlight assem-

bly.

14. Reinstall the headlight assembly

to the body of the vehicle.

OPS073047

OPS073026

■Type A

■Type B

OPS073046

779

Maintenance

Headlight bulb (Low)

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre-

vious page.

6.Remove the headlight bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.

7.Remove the bulb from the assem-

bly by turning it counterclockwise.

8.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the housing and rotating in until it

locks into place.

9.Install the headlight bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

Front turn signal/position light

OPS073047

OPS073023

■Type A

■Type B

Low High

■Type A

■Type B OPS073049

Turn signal

OPS073024

Turn signal

Position

OPS073048

Maintenance

807

Bulb type

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre-

vious page.

6. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket.

8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

9. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly and

turning the socket clockwise.

10. Reinstall the light assembly to

the body of the vehicle.

LED type

If the light bulb is not operating, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

Front side marker

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre-

vious page.

6.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7.Pull the bulb out of the socket.

8.Insert a new bulb into the socket.

9.Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots on the assembly and

turning the socket clockwise.

OPS073025

781

Maintenance

Front fog lamp bulbs

(if equipped)

1. Remove the front bumper under

cover.

2. Reach your hand into the back of

the front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector

from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket

counter clockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on

the socket with the slots in the

housing. Push the socket into the

housing and turn the socket clock-

wise.

6. Connect the power connector to

the socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under

cover.

✽✽NOTICE

If the headlight aiming adjustment

is necessary after the headlight

assembly is reinstalled, consult an

authorized Kia dealer.

Side repeater light bulb

replacement (if equipped)

If the light bulb is not operating, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

OPS073028

OPS073027

OPS073035

Maintenance

827

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

(1) Tail light and side marker

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Stop and tail light

(5) Tail light

(6) Tail/Stop light and side marker

(LED)

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retain-

ing screws with a philips head

screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the

vehicle.

OPS073031

OPS073030

OPS073029

■Type A

■Type B

783

Maintenance

Tail light and side marker, Turn

signal light and Stop and tail light

4. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly and

turning the socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

Back-up light

Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-

vious page.

4.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

OPS073032

OPS073034

Tail and side maker

Turn signal

Tail and stop

Tur n

signal

■Type A

■Type B

Tail

OPS073032

OPS073045

Back-up

Maintenance

847

5.Pull the bulb out of the socket.

6.Insert a new bulb into the socket.

7.Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots on the assembly and

turning the socket clockwise.

8.Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

High mounted stop light

replacement

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Loosen the retaining bolts.

Bulb type

4. Pull out the module from the high

mounted stop light assembly by

pulling both clips.

5. Replace the bulbs by pulling it out.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order.

OPS073037

OPS073038

OPS073036

OPS073052

785

Maintenance

LED type (if equipped)

5.Replace the LED with new one.

6.Reinstall in the reverse order.

License plate light bulb

replacement

1. Remove the lens by pressing the

tabs.

2. Remove the socket from the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it

counter clockwise.

4. Install a new bulb in the socket

and install the socket to the lens.

5. Reinstall the lens securely.

OPS073053

OPS073050

Maintenance

867

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-

or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap

the lens into place.

WARNING - Interior lights

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF”

button is depressed to avoid

burning your fingers or receiv-

ing an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be careful not to dirty or dam-

age the lens, lens tab, and plas-

tic housings.

Map lamp

Room lamp

Glove box lamp

Luggage lamp

Vanity mirror lamp

OPS073041/OPS073042/OPS073043/

OPS073044/OXM079041

787

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least once

a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-

rials. Make sure the drain holes in the

lower edges of the doors and rocker

panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar

deposits can damage your vehicle’s

finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if they

have been affected by water. If braking

performance is impaired, dry the

brakes by applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward speed.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi-

cient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component

damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors

or its surrounding area directly with

a high pressure washer. Shock

applied from high pressure water

may cause the device to not oper-

ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers) or

connectors as they may be dam-

aged if they come into contact with

high pressure water.

Maintenance

887

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle

before waxing. Use a good quality

liquid or paste wax, and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all

metal trim to protect it and to main-

tain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

✽✽NOTICE

Do not apply wax on embossed

unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the

unit.

CAUTION -Wetting

engine

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical

circuits located in the engine

compartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

CAUTION - Drying vehicle

• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth will

scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-

sive cleaners, acid detergents

or strong detergents contain-

ing high alkaline or caustic

agents on chrome-plated or

anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to

the protective coating and

cause discoloration or paint

deterioration.

OJB037800

789

Maintenance

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major

repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and

requires any metal repair or replace-

ment, be sure the body shop applies

anti-corrosion materials to the parts

repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-

metal parts from corrosion, apply a

coating of wax or chrome preser-

vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive petroleum

jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these

materials are not removed, acceler-

ated rusting can occur on underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end

of each winter. Pay special attention

to these areas because it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of the doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not be

allowed to clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rust-

ing.

Maintenance

907

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, or

wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

They may scratch or damage the

finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water. Also, be sure to clean

the wheels after driving on salted

roads. This helps prevent corro-

sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with

highspeed vehicle wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid

detergents It may damage and cor-

rode the aluminum wheels coated

with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, we produce vehicles of

the highest quality. However, this is

only part of the job. To achieve the

long-term corrosion resistance your

vehicle can deliver, the owner's

cooperation and assistance is also

required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is

particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated cor-

rosion are road salts, dust control

chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to

occur. For example, corrosion is

accelerated by high humidity, partic-

ularly when temperatures are just

above freezing. In such conditions,

the corrosive material is kept in con-

tact with the vehicle’s surface by

moisture that evaporates slowly.

Mud is particularly corrosive

because it dries slowly and holds

moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry,

it can still retain the moisture and

promote corrosion.

791

Maintenance

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials. This applies not only to the vis-

ible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from

beginning by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free

of corrosive materials. Attention to

the underside of the vehicle is partic-

ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the

vehicle, give particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will

accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly

effective in removing accumulated

mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp,

poorly ventilated garage. This cre-

ates a favorable environment for cor-

rosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your vehicle in the garage or

drive it into the garage when it is still

wet or covered with snow, ice or

mud. Even a heated garage can con-

tribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Maintenance

927

CAUTION - Leather

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alco-

hol content solutions. If you use

high alcohol content solutions

or acid/alkaline detergents, the

color of the leather may fade or

the surface may get stripped off.

Keep paint and trim in good con-

dition

Scratches or chips in the finish

should be covered with "touch-up"

paint as soon as possible to reduce

the possibility of corrosion. If bare

metal is showing through, the atten-

tion of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are

highly corrosive and may damage

painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as

soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor

mats and carpeting and cause corro-

sion. Check under the mats periodi-

cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertil-

izers, cleaning materials or chemi-

cals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in

proper containers and any spills or

leaks should be cleaned up, flushed

with clean water and thoroughly

dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-

er, and air freshener from contacting

the interior parts because they may

cause damage or discoloration. If

they do contact the interior parts,

wipe them off immediately. If neces-

sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product

instructions for correct usage.

CAUTION - Electrical

components

Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

793

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-

rior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from

vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a

vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-

diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its color can be affected. Also, its

fire-resistant properties can be

reduced if the material is not proper-

ly maintained.

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt

webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken

it.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the

vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-

ered with an oily, greasy or waxy

film), they should be cleaned with a

glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear window

Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the rear window. This

may result in damage of the rear

window defroster grid.

Maintenance

947

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty

information contained in the

Warranty & Maintenance booklet in

your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control

systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function

of the emission control systems, it is

recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected and maintained by

an authorized Kia dealer in accor-

dance with the maintenance sched-

ule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-

ing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by

pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is

completed, turn the ESC system

back on by pressing the ESC

switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air

intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by

gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-

trol (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery)

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

(The ORVR system is designed to

allow the vapors from the fuel tank to

be loaded into a canister while refu-

eling at the gas station, preventing

the escape of fuel vapors into the

atmosphere.)

795

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in

the canister are drawn into the surge

tank through the purge control sole-

noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the

engine. After the engine warms up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system

which controls exhaust emissions

while maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could

affect its performance, safety or

durability and may even violate gov-

ernmental safety and emissions reg-

ulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modifi-

cation may not be covered under

warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage,

battery discharge and fire. For your

safety, do not use unauthorized

electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes.

Therefore, if you smell exhaust

fumes of any kind inside your vehi-

cle, have it inspected and repaired

immediately. If you ever suspect

exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all

the windows fully open. Have your

vehicle checked and repaired

immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide (CO). Though

colorless and odorless, it is

dangerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

on this page to avoid CO poi-

soning.

Maintenance

967

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as

garages) any more than what is

necessary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running,

adjust the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into the

vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-

ic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-

alytic converter emission control

device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-

tion, such as misfire or a noticeable

loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the

engine. Examples of misuse are

coasting with the ignition off and

descending steep grades in gear

with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high

idle speed for extended periods (5

minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any

part of the engine or emission con-

trol system. All inspections and

adjustments must be made by an

authorized Kia dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, dam-

aging the catalytic converter.

WARNING

- Catalytic converter

Keep away from the catalytic

converter and exhaust system

while the vehicle is running or

immediately thereafter. The

exhaust and catalytic systems

are very hot and may burn you.

WARNING - Fire

• Do not park, idle or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Also, do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle or do not coat the

vehicle for corrosion control.

It may present a fire risk under

certain conditions.

797

Maintenance

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalyt-

ic converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void

your warranties.

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Capacity/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6

• Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Specifications & Consumer information

DIMENSIONS

Item mm (in)

Overall length 4,140 (162.9)

Overall width 1,800 (70.9)

Overall height 1,600 (62.9) *1/1,615 (63.6) *2/1,612 (63.5) *3

Front tread

205/60R16 1,576 (62.1)

215/55R17 1,568 (61.7)

235/45R18 1,560 (61.4)

Rear tread

205/60R16 1,588 (62.5)

215/55R17 1,580 (62.2)

235/45R18 1,573 (61.9)

Wheelbase 2,570 (101.2)

*1without roof rack

*2with roof rack

*3with sunroof and roof rack

Item 1.6L 2.0L

Displacement cc (cu. in) 1,591 (97.1) 1,999 (121.9)

Bore x Stroke

mm (in.) 77x85.44 (3.03x3.36) 81x97 (3.19x3.81)

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line

ENGINE

Specifications & Consumer information

BULB WATTAGE

* If equipped

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Front

Headlamps (Low/High) 55/60 H13

Headlamps (Low) 55 H7SLL

Headlamps (Low)-HID type* 35 D3S

Headlamps (High) 55 H7LL

Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8W

Front position lamps 8 (Opt : LED) PY28/8W (Opt : LED)

Front fog lamps* 35 H8L

Front side marker 5 W5W

Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)* LED LED

Rear

Bulb Type

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Bottom) 28/8 P28/8W

Rear tail lamps (Mid) 5 W5W

Rear tail lamps & side marker (Top) 5 W5W

LED Type Rear Stop lamps LED LED

Rear Tail lamps & side marker LED LED

Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W

Back-up lamps 16 W16W

High mounted stop lamps 5 (Opt :LED*) W5W (Opt : LED*)

License plate lamps 5 W5W

Interior

Map lamps 8 FESTOON

Room lamps 8 FESTOON

Personal lamps LED LED

Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON

Glove box lamps 5 FESTOON

Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON

Specifications & Consumer information

TIRES AND WHEELS

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Item Tire size Wheel sizee

Inflation pressure bar kPa (psi)

Wheel lug nut torque

Kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)

Normal load

()

Maximum load

()

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

205/60R16 6.5JX16

230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)

9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

215/55R17 6.5JX17

235/45R18 7.5JX18

Compact spare tire

(if equipped) T125/80D16 4.0TX16 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)

✽✽NOTICE

We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles.

If not, that affects driving performance.

Specifications & Consumer information

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item 1.6 Engine 2.0 Engine

M/T A/T M/T A/T

Gross vehicle weight

kg (lbs.) 1,740 (3,836) 1,770 (3,902) 1,770 (3,902) 1,860 (4,100)

Luggage volume (SAE)

l(cu ft)

Min : 686 (24.2)

Max : 1,735 (61.3)

Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.

Max : Behind front seat to roof.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Item Weight of volume Classification

Refrigerant 550g R-134a

Compressor lubricant 110g FD46XG (IDEMITSU)

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

Specifications & Consumer information

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 1.6 Engine 3.6 l(3.80 US qt.)

(drain and refill)

recommended 2.0 Engine 4.0 l(4.23 US qt.)

(or equivalent)

1.6 Engine 1.8~1.9 l

API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)

Manual transaxle fluid (1.9~2.0 US qt.)

2.0 Engine 1.9~2.0 l

(2.0~2.11 US qt.)

1.6 Engine

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.3 l(7.71 US qt.)

2.0 Engine

MICHANG ATF SP-IV

SK ATF SP-IV

NOCA ATF SP-IV

Kia genuine ATF SP-IV

*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute

to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements

are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

API Service SM*3or obove

ILSAC GF-4 or above

ACEA A5 or above

Specifications & Consumer information

Lubricant Volume Classification

Coolant

1.6 Engine M/T 5.1 l(5.39 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum

radiator)

A/T 5.0 l(5.29 US qt.)

2.0 Engine M/T 5.1 l(5.39 US qt.)

A/T 5.0 l(5.29 US qt.)

Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 l

(0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 54 l(14.26 US gal.) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1

Specifications & Consumer information

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or draining

any lubricant. This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine and

other mechanisms that could be

damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has

an effect on fuel economy and cold

weather operating (engine start and

engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-

ty engine oils can provide better fuel

economy and cold weather perform-

ance, however, higher viscosity

engine oils are required for satisfac-

tory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than

those recommended could result in

engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the

range of temperature your vehicle

will be operated in before the next oil

change. Proceed to select the rec-

ommended oil viscosity from the

chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Gasoline

Engine Oil *1

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the

engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM /

ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not avail-

able in your country, select the proper engine oil using

the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20 (5W-30)

Specifications & Consumer information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-

ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the front passenger seat. To

check the number, remove the cover

(1).

The VIN is also on a plate attached

to the top of the dashboard. The

number on the plate can easily be

seen through the windshield from

outside.

The vehicle certification label

attached on the driver’s side center

pillar gives the vehicle identification

number (VIN).

OUN088001 OVQ076002N

OUN086004

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

Specifications & Consumer information

108

The tires supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's

side center pillar gives the tire pres-

sures recommended for your vehicle.

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

ENGINE NUMBER

OUN086005

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

OAM082007L

■Engine 2.0

■Engine 1.6

ORB080005

Index

Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . . . 3-39

Adding equipment to or modifying your

air bag-equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Do not Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-57

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147

Aux, USB and iPod®port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148

Speaker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-115

Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Index

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Capacity/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . 5-40

To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

To resume cruising speed at more than

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . 5-39

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . 5-41

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-20

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-19

Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6,7-3

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Index

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-23

Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3

Gasoline containing MMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Use of MTBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Jack and tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Use of temporary compact spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit). . . . . . . 6-18

Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . 6-23

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Index

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Instrument Cluster Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

LCD Display Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

ISG system deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

ISG system malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Index

Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-84

Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85

Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-82

Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81

Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Headlamp escort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant

and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Index

Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Front seat adjustment - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

FLEX steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Index

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Closing the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47,8-4

Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-47

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Removable towing hook (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Vehicle Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Index

Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-56

Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Don’t let your parking brake freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-57

Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system. . 5-56

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-56

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Windshield wiper/washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Kia 2015 Soul Owners Manual Pdf 15soul En

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation